中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语（整理19篇）

时间：2024-05-02 09:52:37 李欢欢互汇范文网

中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语（整理19篇）

以下是小编给大家收集的中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语，本文共19篇，欢迎大家前来参阅。

中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语

篇1：中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语

with+宾语+宾语补足语是一个十分有用的结构，具体地说，它有以下几种类型：

1. with+宾语+形容词

He often sleeps with the windows open. 他常开着窗睡觉。

Don’t speak with your mouth full. 不要满嘴巴食物说话。

2. with＋宾语＋副词

He stood before his teacher with his head down. 他低着头站在老师面前。

He was lying on the bed with all his clothes on. 他和衣躺在床上。

3. with＋宾语＋名词

He died with his daughter yet a schoolgirl. 他去世时，女儿还是个小学生。

4. with＋宾语＋介词短语

She said good-bye with tears in her eyes. 她含着眼泪说了声再见。

He was asleep with his head on his arms. 他头枕着胳膊睡着了。

5. with＋宾语＋现在分词(短语)

He fell asleep with the lamp burning. 他没熄灯就睡着了。

I won’t be able to go on holiday with my mother being ill. 因为妈妈有病，我无法去度假。

6. with＋宾语＋过去分词(短语)

He sat there with his eyes closed. 他闭目坐在那儿。

All the afternoon he worked with the door locked. 整个下午他都锁着门在房里工作。

7. with＋宾语＋不定式(短语)

I can’t go out with all these clothes to wash. 要洗这些衣服，我无法出去了。

With so many people to help us, we are sure to finish it in time. 有这么多人帮忙，我们一定能按时完成。

[中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语]

篇2：中考英语知识点总结

中考备考知识点有哪些?下面是小编为大家整理的关于中考英语知识点总结，希望对您有所帮助。欢迎大家阅读参考学习!

中考英语知识点总结

1、词类：英语词类分十种：

名词、形容词、代词、数词、冠词、动词、副词、介词、连词、感叹词。

1、名词(n.)：表示人、事物、地点或抽象概念的名称。如：boy， morning， bag， ball， class， orange。

2、代词(pron.)：主要用来代替名词。如：who， she， you， it 。

3、形容词(adj.)：表示人或事物的性质或特征。如：good， right， white， orange 。

4、数词(num.)：表示数目或事物的顺序。如：one， two， three， first， second， third， fourth。

5、动词(v.)：表示动作或状态。如：am， is，are，have，see 。

6、副词(adv.)：修饰动词、形容词或其他副词，说明时间、地点、程度等。如：now， very， here， often， quietly， slowly。

7、冠词(art.)：用在名词前，帮助说明名词。如：a， an， the。

8、介词(prep.)：表示它后面的名词或代词与其他句子成分的关系。如in， on， from， above， behind。

9、连词(conj.)：用来连接词、短语或句子。如and， but， before 。

10、感叹词(interj.)表示喜、怒、哀、乐等感情。如：oh， well， hi， hello。

2、句子成分：英语句子成分分为七种：主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、宾语补足语。

1、主语是句子所要说的人或事物，回答是“谁”或者“什么”。通常用名词或代词担任。如：I’m Miss Green。(我是格林小姐)

2、谓语动词说明主语的动作或状态，回答“做(什么)”。主要由动词担任。如：Jack cleans the room every day。 (杰克每天打扫房间)

3、表语在系动词之后，说明主语的身份或特征，回答是“什么”或者“怎么样”。通常由名词、代词或形容词担任。如：My name is Ping ping 。(我的名字叫萍萍)

4、宾语表示及物动词的对象或结果，回答做的是“什么”。通常由名词或代词担任。如：He can spell the word。(他能拼这个词)

有些及物动词带有两个宾语，一个指物，一个指人。指物的叫直接宾语，指人的叫间接宾语。间接宾语一般放在直接宾语的前面。如：He wrote me a letter 。 (他给我写了一封信)

有时可把介词to或for加在间接宾语前构成短语，放在直接宾语后面，来强调间接宾语。如：He wrote a letter to me 。 (他给我写了一封信)

5、定语修饰名词或代词，通常由形容词、代词、数词等担任。如：

Shanghai is a big city 。(上海是个大城市)

6、状语用来修饰动词、形容词、副词，通常由副词担任。如：He works hard 。(他工作努力)

7、宾语补足语用来说明宾语怎么样或干什么，通常由形容词或动词充当。如：They usually keep their classroom clean。(他们通常让教室保持清洁) / He often helps me do my lessons。(他常常帮我做功课) / The teacher wanted me to learn French all by myself。(老师要我自学法语)

☆同位语通常紧跟在名词、代词后面，进一步说明它的情况。如：Where is your classmate Tom ?(你的同学汤姆在哪里?)

3、构词法：英语构词法主要有：合成法、派生法和转换法。

1、合成法：如：spaceship， headache， basketball， playground等等。

2、派生法：

(1)派生名词：①动词+er/or ②动词+ing ③动词+(t)ion ④形容词+ness ⑤其他，如：inventor， learner， swimming， congratulation， kindness， carelessness， knowledge

(2)派生形容词：①名词+y ②名词+ful ③动词+ing/ed ④friendly ⑤dangerous ⑥Chinese; Japanese ⑦English ⑧French ⑨German ⑩国名+(i)an 如：snowy， sunny， hopeful， beautiful， interesting， follwing， daily(每日的)，nervous， delicious

(3)派生副词：①形容词+ly ②其它，如：slowly， angrily， full→fully， good→well， possible→possibly等等。

3、转换法：

(1)形容词→动词，如：dry(干燥的)→dry(弄干)， clean(干净的)→clean(打扫，弄干净)，等等。

(2)动词→名词，如：look， walk， rest， work， study， swim， go， talk等等。

(3)名词→动词，如：hand(手)→(传递)，face(脸)→(面对)等等。

(4)形容词→副词，如：early→early， fast→fast等等。

(5)副词→连词，如：when(什么时候)→(当……时候)，等等。

(6)介词→副词，如：in(到……里)→(在里面;在家)，on(在…上)→(进行，继续)，等等。

篇3：中考英语知识点总结人教版

中考英语知识点归纳总结人教版免费

中考英语必考重点语法

一. 词法

1. 名词

(1)名词的可数与不可数

可数名词指表示的人或事物可以用数来计量，它有单数与复数两种形式。不可数名词指所表示的事物不能用数来计量。物质名词与抽象名词一般无法用数目，来统计，都成为不可数名词。

不可数名词前一般不能用冠词a、an来表示数量，没有复数形式。要表示“一个……”这一概念，就须加a piece of这一类短语。要注意许多名词在汉语里看来是可数名词，在英语里却不可数。如：chalk，paper，bread，rice，grass，news等。

(2)名词复数的规则变化

A.一般情况下加-s。

B.以s, x, ch, sh, 结尾的加-es

C.以辅音字母加y结尾的改y为i再加-es

D.以f，fe结尾的，去掉f或fe，变成v再加-es

(3)名词的所有格

A. 单数名词词尾加’s，复数名词词尾若没有s，也要加’s。

如：the worker's bike，the Children’ s ball

B. 表示几个人共有一样东西，只需在最后一个人的名字后加’ s若表示各自所有，则需在各个名字后’ s。

如： This is Lucy and Licy’ s room.

These are Kate's and jack’ s rooms.

C. 如果是通过在词尾加—s构成的复数形式的名词，只加’。

如：the students’ books，the girls’ blouses

(另外：名词+of+名词名词是有生命的，我们就用’s结构来表示所有关系。如果名词所表示的事物是无生命的，我们就要用名词+of+名词的结构来表示所有关系。)

2. 代词

人称代词，物主代词，反身代词，指示代词，不定代词

(1)人称代词

第一人称单数

I me my mine myself

复数 we us our ours ourselves

第二人称

单数 you you your yours yourself

复数 you you your yours yourselves

第三人称

单数 he him his his himself

she her her hers herself

it it its its itself

复数 they them their theirs themselves

(2)物主代词

物主代词的用法：形容词性物主代词后面一定要跟上一个名词;

名词性物主代词可作主语、表语、宾语。

(3)反身代词

反身代词的构成分两种：第一、二人称反身代词在形容词性物主代词后加上self或selves，第三人称的反身代词在宾格代词后加上self或selves.

反身代词的用法：一种是作宾语，由主语发出的动作又回到动作者本身。如：I enjoyed myself at the party. 另一种是作名词或代词的同位语;用来加强语气。如：I can do it myself.

(4)指示代词

指示代词的特殊用法：

(1)为了避免重复，可用that，those代替前面提到过的名词，但是this，these不可以。

(2)this，that有时可代替句子或句子中的一部分。

(5)不定代词

one,some,any,other,another,all,both,each,neither,many,much等

3. 冠词

(1)不定冠词an用在元音读音开头(不是指元音字母)的词前，其余用不定冠词a.

(2)定冠词的基本用法

A. 用在重新提到的人或事物前面。

B. 指谈话双方都知道的人或事物前面。

C. 用在单数可数名词前面，表示某一类人或事物。

(3)定冠词的特殊用法

A. 用在世界上独一无二的事物或方位名词前。

B. 用在序数词、形容词的最高级及only所修饰的名词前。

C. 用在江河、海洋、山脉、湖泊、群岛的名称前面。

D. 用在由普通名词和另外一些词所构成的专有名词前面。

E. 用在姓氏的复数形式前面，表示全家人或这一姓的夫妇二人。

F. 用在乐器名称前。

G. 和某些形容词连用，表示某一类人或事物。

(4)名词前不用冠词的情况

A. 在专有名词 (包括人名、地名、节日、月份、季节) 、物质名词和抽象名词前—般不用冠词。但在以Festival组成的民间节日前要加the。

B. 表示一类人或事物的复数名词前。

C. 名词前有物主代词、指示代词、不定代词或名词所有格修饰时，不用冠词。

D. 三餐饭、球类、棋类、游戏名称前一般不用冠词。正在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。

(sit) at table就餐; sit at the table坐在桌边

go to school去上学;go to the school去那所学校;in hospital住院;in the hospital在那个医院里

4. 数词

(1)数字的表示

三位数数词要在百位和十位(若无十位则和个位)之间加and。

1，000以上的数字，从后向前第三位数加一个“，”，第一个“，”前为thousand，第二个“，”前为million，第三个“，”前为billion。

(2)序数词除了first，second，third外，其余都在基数词尾加-th构成。

(3)分数分子在前，分母在后，分子用基数词，分母用序数词，当分子大于1小时，分母序数词要变成复数。

(4)hundreds(thousands，millions)of……

5. 形容词、副词

(1)形容词的位置

A. 形容词作定语一般要放在名词前面，但当形容词修饰不定代词something，nothing，anything时要放在所修饰的不定代词之后。如：something important，nothing serious。

B. 当形容词带有表示度量的词或词组作定语或表语时，定语或表语要后置。如：

We have dug a hole two meters deep.

The hole is about two metres deep.

(2)形容词的比较等级

单音节词和少数双音节词，在词尾加—(e)r，—(e)st来构成比较级和最高级。其他双音节词和多音节词，在前面加more，most来构成比较级和最高级。如：

popular———more popular———most popular

important—more important—most important

(3)副词的比较等级

单音节副词和个别双音节副词通过加-er，-est来构成比较级和最高级。绝大多数副词借助more，most来构成比较级和最高级。

(4)少数形容词和副词比较级/最高级的不规则变化：

原级比较级最高级

well —— better —— best

badly —— worse —— worst

much —— more —— most

little —— less —— least

far —— farther —— farthest

farthest furthest

late —— later —— latest

(5)副词的最高级前面可以不加定冠词the。

6. 介词

(1)表示时间的介词及介词短语

in, at, on, before，after，till，since，for, fromto, until， by，in the middle of，at the beginning of， at the end of，at half past five，at night，in a week，in the morning，in class，at sunrise， in spring/summer/autumn/winter，on Sunday，on Saturday afternoon，on a winter evening，for a long time，for two months，after school，since liberation，before lunch，at the time of，at the age of

(2)表示地点的介词及介词短语

in，at，into，to，on，beside，before，behind，above，under，outside,inside,up,from,far,from,near,across， off， down， among， past，between，out of，around，in the front of， in the middle of， at the back of，at the foot of，at home，at the gate，at the table，in the sky， on the ground，in a tree， in the south，in the sun，in the bed，on one’s way home，by the side of

二. 八种基本时态

1. 一般现在时

概念: 表示经常发生的动作或经常存在的状态。

常和 always , often , usually , sometimes , every day 等表时间的状语连用。

如：1) I go to school every day . 我每天都去学校。(表经常)

2) He is always like that . 他总是那样。 (表状态)

构成： 1) 主语 + be (am / are / is ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词/三单动词 + …

2.一般过去时

概念: 1) 表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

常和表示过去的时间状语连用. 如: yesterday , last week , in , two days ago等.

如: I went to a movie yesterday. 我昨天去看了一场电影.

2) 也可表示过去经常或反复发生的动作.

如: He always went to work by bike last week.

构成: 1) 主语 + be (was / were ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词过去式 +

3. 现在进行时

概念: 表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作.

如: He is singing.

They are watching TV now.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(am/are/is) + 动词-ing形式构成.

4. 过去进行时

概念: 表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作. 这一特定的过去时间除了有上下文暗示外,一般用时间状语来表示.

如: 1) ---What were you doing?

---I was jumping.

2) ---What was the boy doing when the UFO arrived?

---He was sleeping.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(was/were) + 动词-ing形式构成.

5. 一般将来时

概念: 表示将来某个时间要发生的动作或存在的状态,也表示将来经常或反复发生的动作,常与表示将来的时间状语连用,如: tomorrow, next week, next year, in the future等.

如: He will go shopping tomorrow.

They are going to play basketball next week.

构成: 1) 主语 + 助动词will + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + be going to + 动原 + ….

6. 过去将来时

概念: 表示在过去将来的某一时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

构成: 1) 主语(第一人称) + 助动词should + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + would + 动原 + ….

3) 主语 + was/ were going to +动原…

用法: 过去将来时除了上下文暗示外,一般常用在间接引语中,主句谓语动词为过去时态.

如: 1) I should go.

2) You knew I would come.

3) They were going to Naning.

7. 现在完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 ( have / has ) + 动词过去分词 +…

用法例句

表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果. ---Have you had your lunch yet?

---Yes, I have. (现在我不饿了)

8. 过去完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 had + 动词过去分词 +…

用法例句

表示过去在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作.它表示的动作发生的时间是”过去的过去”.表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语,也可用when, before, 等引导的从句或者通过上下文表示.

I had finished my homework when my mom came back home.

三. 三大基本从句

从句的共同特点

从句是指在一个句子中充当一个成分的句子，充当什么成分就叫什么从句，如：充当宾语就叫宾语从句，充当定语成分就叫定语从句。

从以上定义中我们可以得出关于从句的一个最大特点：从句是句子。

从句的共同特点：1.从句都有自己的连接词 2.从句都是陈述语序(陈述语序就是主语在前，谓语在后，如：He is a teacher主语 He 在谓语is之前，因此是陈述语序，而Is he a teacher? 主语 He 在谓语is之后，因此不是陈述语序。)

1. 宾语从句

宾语从句是指在一个句子中充当宾语的句子，如：He said that he wanted to be a teacher when he grew up.

宾语从句的特点：

①宾语从句有自己的连接词

②宾语从句用陈述语序

③宾语从句的时态

(1)宾语从句的连接词：宾语从句的连接词包括that、if/whether(是否)、特殊疑问词。

(2)宾语从句的语序：

A. 宾语从句的连接词后加陈述语序(主语在前，谓语在后),如：I want to know if he can come tomorrow

B. 当连接词本身又是宾语从句的主语时，后面直接加谓语动词，如：She asked me who had helped him.

(3)宾语从句的时态，只要记住以下口诀就可以了“主现则从任，主过则从过，客观真理一般现”

A. 主现则从任：主句如果是一般现在时，则从句根据时间状语需要从八种时态中任选一种，如：1.He tells me he likes English very much(一般现在时)

B. 主过则从过：主句如果是一般过去时，则从句根据时间状语需要从四种带“过”字的时态中任选一种，带“过”字的时态分别是如：一般过去时，过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时。

如：He told me that he liked playing football(一般过去时)

C. 客观真理一般现:客观真理永远用一般现在时。

如：1.He says the moon goes around the earth.

2. 状语从句

(1)时间状语从句：在一个句子中作时间状语的句子。

时间状语的连接词：when(当…时候) while(当…时候) as(当…时候) after(在…以后) before(在…以前) as soon as(一…就) since(自从…到现在) till /until(直到…

才) by the time(到…为止)依旧是连接词后加陈述语序。

举例：when当…的时候(一般情况下主句是将来时的时候，从句要用一般现在时。)

Mozart started writing music when he was four years old.

(2)原因状语从句：在一个句子中作原因状语的句子。

连接词：由连词because, since, as引导, 也可由for, now that 等词引导。

举例：I didn’t go to school yesterday because I was ill.

(3)条件状语从句：在一个句子中作条件状语的句子。

连接词：if如果, unless (=if not) 除非。(让步)

举例：If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we will go hiking.

(4)目的、结果状语从句

目的状语从句是指在一个句子中充当目的状语的句子。

结果状语从句是指在一个句子中充当结果状语的句子

目的状语从句连接词so that, so…that , in order that 引导。

结果状语从句连接词 so…that, such…that, so much/many…that引导。

举例：so…that 如此…以至于

The scientist’s report was so instructive that we were all very excited.

(5)让步状语从句

让步状语从句是指在句子中作让步的状语的句子

连接词： though, although.，whether…or not

举例：Although he is rich, yet he is not happy.

3.no matter从句

结构：“no matter +特殊疑问词疑问词+陈述语序” 或“特殊疑问词+后缀ever+陈述语序”

如：No matter what happened, he would not mind.

注意：no matter 不能引导主语从句和宾语从句。

3. 定语从句

定语是指在句子中用来修饰名词、代词的成分。

如：I will give my teacher a bunch of beautiful flower.(中beautiful就是定语)

定语从句是指在一个句子中作定语的句子，定语从句要放在所修饰的词后

如：I have met the doctor who is in the No.1 hospital.

定语从句的连接词：

连接代词：who、which、whom、whose、that

连接副词：when、where、why

中考英语必考60个经典知识点

1. as…as 和……一样

中间必须用形容词或副词原级。例如：

This classroom is as big as that one.

这间教室和那间一样大。

He runs as fast as Tom. 他和汤姆跑的一样快。

否定结构：not as/so…as,“不如……”。上面的两个句子可分别改为：

This classroom is not as/so large as that one.

这间教室不如那间大。

He doesn’t run as/so fast as Tom.

他跑得不如汤姆快。

2. as soon as 一……就……

用来引导时间状语从句。若主句是一般将来时，从句要用一般现在时。例如：

I’ll tell him the plan as soon as I see him.

我一看到他就告诉他这个计划。

He’ll go home as soon as he finishes his work.

他一完成工作就回家。

3. be busy/enjoy/hate/go on/finish doing sth. 忙于/喜欢/讨厌/继续/完成做某事

在enjoy, finish, hate, go on, be busy等词语后，一般用动词-ing形式作宾语。例如：

Lin Tao is busy making a model plane.

林涛正忙着做飞机模型。

My mother enjoys taking a walk after supper.

我妈妈喜欢晚饭后散步。

I hate watching Channel Five.

我讨厌看五频道。

When someone asked him to have a rest, he just went on working.

当有人让他休息一会儿时，他仍继续工作。

I have finished writing the story.

我已经写完了故事。

4. fill…with 用……装满......;be filled with 充满了……;be full of 充满了......

①be filled with 说明由外界事物造成的此种状态，表示被动。例如：

The box is filled with food.

盒子里装满了食物。

②be full of说明主语处于的状态。此外，还可表示程度，意为“非常”。例如：

The patient’s room is full of flowers.

那个病人的房间摆满了花。

The young man is full of pride.

那个年轻人非常骄傲。

③这两种结构还可以相互改写。例如：

I fill the box with food. The box is full of food.

5. be good/bad for 有利于/有害于……

此句型是：be + adj. + for + n.结构。例如：

Doing morning exercises is good for your health.

做早操对你的健康有益。

Always playing computer games is bad for your study.

总玩电脑游戏对你的学习不利。

6. be used to(doing) sth.习惯于……

后必须接名词或动名词，可用于现在、过去、将来的多种时态。be 可用get, become来代替。例如：

He is used to life in the country.(He is used to living in the country.)

他习惯于乡村生活。

He will get used to getting up early.

他将会习惯于早起。

注意：be used to do 的意思是“被用来做……”。例如：

Wood is used to make paper.

木材被用来造纸。

7. both…and…两者都……

用来连接两个并列成分;当连接两个并列主语时，其后谓语动词用复数。例如：

Both the students and the teachers will go to the History Museum tomorrow.

不论老师还是学生明天都会去历史博物馆。

8. can’t help doing sth. 禁不住做某事

help在此的意思是“抑制,忍住”，其后接动词-ing形式。例如：

His joke is too funny. We can’t help laughing.

他的笑话太有趣了，我们禁不止笑了起来。

9. sth. costs sb. some money 某物花费某人多少钱

此句型的主语是物。cost一词带的是双宾语，它的过去式、过去分词和原型一样。

This book cost me five Yuan.

这本书花了我五元钱。

10. either…or… 不是……就是……,或者……或者……

用来连接两个并列成分，当连接并列主语时，谓语动词与邻近的主语保持一致。

You may either stay here or go home.

你可以呆在这儿，也可以回家。

Either she or I am right. = Either I or she is right.

不是她对就是我对。

11. enough (for sb.) to do sth. 足够……做……

在此结构中,for用来引出不定式的逻辑主语。例如：

The ice isn’t thick enough for you to walk on.

这冰还没有厚到你可以在上面走的程度。

12. feel like doing sth. 想要做某事

此处like为介词，后面跟动词-ing形式。此句型与would like to do sth.同义。例如：

I feel like drinking a cup of milk.

我想喝一杯牛奶。

13. feel/find/think it adj./n. to do sth. 认为某事……

在此结构中it为形式宾语，不定式短语作真正的宾语。例如：

I find it very interesting to play football.

我发现踢足球很有趣。

She thinks it her duty to help us.

她认为帮助我们是她的职责。

14. get ready for sth./to do sth.

get ready for sth.意为“为某事做准备”;get ready to do sth.意为“准备做某事”例如：

We are getting ready for the meeting.

我们正在为会议做准备。

They were getting ready to have a sports meet at that moment.

他们那时正准备开运动会。

15. get/receive/ a letter from 收到……的来信

相当于hear from 例如：

Did you receive a letter from John?

你收到约翰的来信了吗?

I got a letter from my brother yesterday.

我昨天收到了我弟弟的一封来信。

16. had better (not) do sth. 最好(别)做某事

had better为情态动词，其后需用动词原形。had better常用缩写，变成’d better，其否定形式是在其后直接加not。例如：

We had better go now. = We’d better go now.

我们最好现在走吧。

You’d better not go out because it is windy.

今天刮风，你最好别出去了。

17. have sth. done 使(某事)完成 (动作由别人完成)

sth.为宾语，done为过去分词作补语。例如：

We had the machine repaired.

我们请人把机器修好了。

注意区分：We have repaired the machine. 我们(自己)已经修好了机器。

18. help sb. (to) do sth./with sth. 帮助某人(做)某事

其中的to可以省略。例如：

I often help my mother with housework.

我常常帮助妈妈做家务。

Would you please help me (to) look up these words?

请你帮助我查查这些词好吗?

19. How do you like…? 你认为……怎么样?

与what do you think of …?同义。例如：

How do you like the weather in Beijing?你

认为北京的天气怎么样? 你觉得这部新电影如何?

20. I don’t think/believe that… 我认我/相信……不……

其中的not是对宾语从句进行否定而不是对主句否定(否定前移)。that可省略。例如：

I don’t think it will rain.

我认为天不会下雨。

I don’t believe the girl will come.

我相信那女孩不会来了。

21. It happens that… 碰巧……

相当于happen to do。例如：

It happened that I heard their secret.

可改写为：I happened to hear their secret.

我碰巧听到了他们的秘密。

22. It’s/has been +一段时间+since从句自从某时起做某件事情已经一段时间了

该句型中since引导的时间状语从句常用一般过去时。例如：

It’s twenty years since he came here.

他来这里已经了。

It has been six years since he married Mary.

他和玛丽结婚已经六年了。

23. It is +adj./n. + for sb. to do sth. 做某事对某人来说……

It是形式主语，真正的主语是不定式to do sth。例如：

It’s not easy for us to study English well.

对我们来说学好英语并不容易。

It’s a good idea for us to travel to the south.

去南方旅行对我们来说是个好主意。

24. It’s + adj. + of sb. to do sth.

It是形式主语，to do sth.是真正的主语, 当表语(即形容词)能对逻辑主语描述时，常用介词of,而不用for。例如：

It’s very polite of you to give your seat to old people.

你给老人让座，非常有礼貌。

25. It seems/appears (to sb) that… (在某人看来)好像……

此句中的it是主语，that引导的是表语从句。例如：

It seems that he is lying. 看样子他好像是在撒谎。

It appears to me that he never smiles. 在我看来，他从来没有笑过。

26. It is +数词+meters/kilometers long/wide… ……是多少米(公里)长(宽)

用来表示物体的长(宽,高)，如数词大于一，名词要用复数。例如：

It is 20 meters long from this end to that end. 从这端到那端有二十米长。

27. It’s time for sb. to do sth. 是某人干某事的时候了

it是形式主语，真正的主语是动词不定式to do sth. 例如：

It’s time for the child to go to bed.

孩子该睡觉了。

比较下面两种结构：

① It’s time for + n. 例如：

It’s time for school.

②It’s time to do sth. 例如：

It’s time to go to school.

28. It takes sb. some time to do sth. 花费某人多少时间做某事

it是形式主语，真正的主语是动词不定式to do sth。例如：

It takes her fifteen minutes to walk to the bus stop from here.

从这儿走着到公交车站将花费她15分钟。

It took the old man three days to finish the work.

那个老人花了三天时间完成这项工作。

29. keep (on) doing sth. 一直坚持做某事

keep doing sth.一般用于静态动词。keep on doing sth.意为“继续不停地做某事”，一般用于动态动词，但二者的区别并不是很严格，有时可以互换。例如：

Don’t keep on doing such foolish things.

不要再做这样的傻事了。

He kept sitting there all day.

他整天坐在那里。

30. keep…from doing sth. 阻止......做某事

相当于stop…from doing sth., prevent…from doing sth. 在主动句中，stop和prevent后面的from可以省略，但在被动结构中，from不可以省略。例如：

Please keep the children from swimming in the sea.

请别让孩子到海里游泳。

The big noise outside my room stopped me from doing my homework.

屋外巨大的噪音使我不能做作业。

31. keep sb. doing sth. 让某人一直做某事

不可和keep sb. from doing sth.结构混淆。

例如：Why do you keep me waiting for a long time? 你为什么让我等了很长时间?

32. make sb. do sth. 使某人干某事

make意为“使”时，其后要有不带to的动词不定式。

例如：He made me work ten hours a day. 他让我每天工作10小时。

注意：上句如改为被动语态，则work 前的to不能省略。例如：

I was made to work ten hours a day.

33. neither…nor… 既不……也不……

当连接两个并列主语时，谓语动词与邻近的主语取得一致(就进一致原则)。例如：

Neither we nor Jack knows him. 我们和杰克都不认识他。

He neither knows nor cares what happened. 他对发生的事情不闻不问。

34. not…until… 直到……才......

until后可跟名词或从句，表示时间。例如：

He didn’t come until late in the evening.他直到晚上很迟才来。

He didn’t arrive until the game began. 直到比赛开始他才来。

35. sb. pays money for sth. 某人花钱买某物

此句型主语是人。例如：

I’ve already paid 2,000 Yuan for the motor bike. 我已经花了元买这辆摩托车。

36. spend time/money on sth./(in)doing sth. 花费(时间、钱)在某事上/做某事

其中in可以省略，通常主语为“人”。例如：

I spent five Yuan on this book. 我在这本书上花了五元钱。

I spent two hours (in) doing my homework yesterday. 昨晚我花了两个小时做作业。

37. so…that… 太……以至于……

用于复合句，that引导的是结果状语从句。so是副词,后面应接形容词或副词，如果接名词，应用such。例如：

The ice is so thin that you can’t walk on it. 冰太薄了，你不能在上面走。

He is such a kind man that we all like him. 他是一个非常好的人，我们都很喜欢他。

38. stop to do sth., stop doing sth.

stop to do sth. 意为“停下来去做另一件事”，stop doing sth.意为“停止正在做的事”例如：

You’re too tired. You’d better stop to have a rest. 你们太累了，最好停下来休息一会儿。

The teacher is coming. Let’s stop talking. 老师来了，咱们别说话了。

39. Thank you for doing sth. 感激你做了某事。

for之后除了加动名词doing外，还可以加名词。例如：

Thank you for giving me the present. 谢谢你给我的礼物。

Thank you for your help. =Thank you for helping me.谢谢你的帮助。

40. thanks to 多亏……,由于……

thanks后的s不能省略，to是介词。例如：

Thanks to my friend Jim, I’ve worked out this problem. 多亏了我朋友吉姆的帮助，我已经解决了这个问题。

41. There be句型

①在此结构中，there是引导词，在句中不能充当任何成分，也不必翻译出来。句中的主语是某人或某物，谓语动词be要与主语的数保持一致。例如：

There is a man at the door. 门口有一个人。

当主语是由两个或者两者以上的名词充当时，谓语动词be要跟它邻近的那个名词的数一致(就近一致)。例如：

There are two dogs and a cat under the table.桌下有两只狗和一只猫。

比较：There is a cat and two dogs under the table.

②There be 句型中的be不能用have来代替，但可以用lie(位于，躺),stand(矗立),exist(生存),live(生活)等词来替换。例如：

There stand a lot of tall buildings on both sides of the street. 街道两旁矗立着许多高楼。

There lies lake in front of our school.我们学校前面有一个湖。

Once there lived a king here. 这儿曾经有一个国王。

There is going to be a sports meeting next week. 下周准备开一个运动会。

there be 的拓展结构：there seem(s)/happen(s) to be…

There seems to be one mistake in spelling.

似乎有一处拼写错误。

There happened to be a ruler here. 这儿碰巧有把尺子。

There seemed to be a lot of people there. 那儿似乎有很多人。

42. The + adj.比较级, the + adj.比较级越……,越……

此句型表示一方随另一方的变化而变化。例如：

The harder he works, the happier he feels.他工作越努力，就感到越幸福。

The more, the better. 多多益善。

43. too + adj./adv. +to do sth. 太……以至于不能…….

此句型为简单句，后面的to表示否定含义。例如：

The ice is too thin for you to walk on. 这冰太薄，你不能在上面走。

The bag is too heavy to carry. 这个袋子太重搬不动。

44. used to do sth. 过去常常做某事

used to是情态动词，表示过去的习惯动作或状态，现在已不存在，因此只用于过去时态。例如:

He used to get up early. 他过去总早起。

When I was young, I used to play tennis very often. 我年轻时经常打网球。

否定形式有两种：didn't use to; used not to,例如：

He didn't use to come. = He used not to come. 他过去不常来。

45. what about…? ……怎么样?

后面可接名词、代词、动名词等。与“how about…?”同义。例如：

We have been to Hainan. What about you? 我们去过海南，你呢?

What about going to the park on Sunday? 星期天去公园怎么样?

46. What day/date is it today? 今天星期几(几月几日)?

—What day is it today?

—Sunday.

—What date is it today?

—June 24th.

47. What’s wrong (the matter) with…? ……怎么了?

What’s wrong with you, Madam? 夫人，您怎么了?

You look worried. What’s wrong with you? 你看上去很焦急，出什么事了?

48. Why not do…? 为什么不做……?

谓语动词用原形。与Why don’t you do…?同义。例如：

Why not go to see the film with us?= Why don’t you go to see the film with us? 为什么不和我们一起去看电影呢?

49. would like to do sth. 想做……

后用动词不定式作宾语。例如：

I would like to drink a cup of tea.我想喝一杯茶。

疑问句式：Would you like (to drink) a cup of tea? 你想喝杯茶吗?

50. adj./adv.比较级 + and adj./adv.比较级越来越......

若形容词/副词为双音节词及多音节词，则这一结构变为“more and more +形容词/副词”。例如：

It’s getting warmer and warmer. 天气变得越来越暖和了。

The little girl becomes more and more beautiful. 小女孩变得越来越漂亮了。

51. adj.比较级+than

than引导的是典型的比较级句型，表示“一者比另一者……”,其前用形容词或副词的比较级，than从句可以用省略形式。例如：

I know you better than she does. 我比她更了解你。

This house is bigger than that one. 这所房子比那所房子大。

52. though-从句

though引导的是让步状语从句，意思是“虽然……但是……”。但不能和but连用，英语中表达“虽然……,但是……”时，though和but只能用一个。例如：

Though it was snowing, it was not very cold. 虽然下着雪，可并不太冷。

I was late for the last bus though I hurried. 虽然我拼命赶路，还是没搭上最后一班公交车。

We didn’t feel tired though we walked a long way. 虽然我们走了很长的路程，但是并没有感到累。

53. if-从句

If 引导的是条件状语从句，“如果;假如“。如主句用一般将来时，if从句要用一般现在时(主将从现)。例如：

If I go to the Great Wall tomorrow, would you like to come along? 如果明天我去长城，你会和我一起去吗?

If it rains tomorrow, I won’t go. 如果明天下雨，我就不去了。

54. because-从句

引导原因状语从句，“因为”。例如：

He didn’t hear the knocking at the door because he was listening to the radio. 他没有听见敲门声，因为他正在听收音机。

55. so + do/be + 主语

“So + be/助动词/情态动词 + 主语” 表示前面所述内容也适用于另一人或物。be、助动词或情态动词的选择视前面陈述句中谓语动词的时态形式而定。例：

He likes football and so do I. 他喜欢足球，我也如此。

Jim was playing football just now and so was Tom. 刚才吉姆在踢足球，汤姆也在踢足球。

比较：“So +主语+be/助动词/情态动词.”结构，是用来证实前一句所表达的内容(起强调作用)。be、助动词或情态动词的选择视前面陈述句中谓语动词的时态形式而定。

A: It is very hot today. 今天天气很热。

B: So it is. 确实如此。

56. not only…but also… 不但……而且……

常用来连接语法作用相同的词、短语或句子。连接两个主语时，谓语动词要和紧靠它的主语在人称和数上保持一致。例如：

She likes not only singing but also dancing. 她不但喜欢唱歌，而且喜欢跳舞。

He is not only a good doctor but also a good father. 他不但是个好医生而且是个好爸爸。

Not only I but also he is hoping to go there. 不但我而且他也想去那儿。

57. prefer…to… 喜欢……胜过…...

prefer (doing) sth. to (doing) sth. 意为“两者相比更喜欢(做)其中之一”。在此结构中，to是介词，接名词或动名词，结构中前后所跟成分一样。例如：

He prefers tea to coffee. 茶与咖啡相比，他更喜欢茶。

He prefers doing shopping to going fishing.购物与钓鱼相比，他更喜欢购物。

58. 感叹句型

What (a/an) + adj. + n. +主语+谓语! How + adj./adv.+ +主语+谓语! 例如：

What a clever boy (he is)! =How clever the boy is! 这个男孩儿多聪明啊!

What a wonderful film we saw last night! 昨天晚上我们看的电影多精彩啊!

How lovely the weather is! 天气多好啊!

How hard he works! 他工作多么努力啊!

59. 祈使句型

祈使句型表示命令、请求、劝告等含义。说话的对象通常为第二人称，习惯上常省略。句末用句号或感叹号。肯定祈使句是：谓语动词用动词原形表示。否定祈使句是：在谓语动词前加do not(don’t)。例如：

Be here on time tomorrow. 明天准时到这儿来。

Say it in English! 用英语说!

Don’t be afraid! 别怕!

Don’t look out of the window! 不要朝窗外看!

60. 并列句型

用并列连词连接起来的两个或两个以上的简单句叫并列句。连接并列句常用的连接词有：and, but, or, so, however, not only…but also..., neither…nor..., either…or…等。例如：

I help her and she helps me. 我帮助她，她帮助我。

He is very old but he is in good health. 他年纪很大了，但他身体很好。

We must hurry, or we’ll be late. 我们得赶快走，不然就晚了。

Kate does her work carefully, so she never makes any mistakes. 凯特工作很认真，从不出错。

中考英语综合测试题

第Ⅰ卷(选择题共85分)

Ⅰ.听力测试

A)听录音，在每组句子中选出一个你所听到的句子。每个句子听一遍。(5分)

( )1.A.It smells terrible.

B.She wants to be an actor.

C.My favorite subject is PE.

( )2.A.Do you have a pet?

B.Are you exercising right now?

C.Can they go to the basketball game?

( )3.A.What time do you take a shower?

B.What club do you want to join?

C.Where’s your backpack?

( )4.A.Rainy days are kind of boring.

B.We’ve been to many wonderful places.

C.It’s one of the most beautiful cities in the northwest of China.

( )5.A.I think sand sliding is the most exciting sport.

B.If I go to college, I’ll never become a great soccer player.

C.Everyone should do what we can do to help the people in trouble.

C)在录音中，你将听到一段对话及五个问题。请根据对话内容及问题选择正确答案。对话及问题听两遍。(5分)

( )11.A.For one year.

B.For half a year.

C.For 8 months.

( )12.A.About 20. B.About 10. C.About 40.

( )13.A.Her aunt. B.Her uncle. C.Her cousin.

( )14.A.Going to the museum.

B.Playing the violin.

C.Painting pictures.

( )15.A.Every day. B.Once a month. C.Once a week.

D)在录音中，你将听到一篇短文及五个问题。请根据短文内容及问题选择正确答案。短文及问题听两遍。(5分)

( )16.A.Sixteen. B.Eighteen. C.Fifteen.

( )17.A.Yes， she is.

B.No, she isn’t.

C.We don’t know.

( )18.A.Jack’s classmate.

B.Jack’s workmate.

C.Jack’s girlfriend.

( )19.A.In Mary’s home.

B.In the office.

C.In Jack’s home.

( )20.A.10 p.m. B.12 a.m. C.12 p.m.

Ⅱ.读音选词根据所给句意和音标,从每题A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出一个正确答案。(5分)

( )21.Please give me a _________ of bread.

A.peel B.prize C.piece D.please

( )22.The students in my class sold newspapers to

________ money to help the homeless.

A.read B.rise C.raise D.rose

( )23.People in Brazil are supposed to________ when they meet for the first time.

A.kiss B.kill C.dance D.bow

( )24.Our English teacher is really ________ . She is never angry with us.

A.painter B.painting C.parents D.patient

( )25.Everyone else in my class was invited ________ me, and I don’t know why.

A.swept B.kept C.except D.accept

Ⅲ.选择填空从每题A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。(30分)

( )26.—What ________ do you like?

—I like green.

A.kind B.size C.time D.color

( )27.Li Na started playing __________ tennis at the age of six. She is one of __________ best women tennis players in the world.

A.the; the B.a; / C./; the D.the; /

( )28.—Is the woman who is singing your teacher?

—Yes, she teaches ________ English.

A.we B.our C.our D.us

( )29.—Peter is ill in hospital.

—I’m not _________ to hear that. I’ve been telling him not to work so late every day!

A.surprised B.sorry C.glad D.excited

( )30.— can we live a low?carbon(低碳的) life?

—OK! Use both sides of the paper and don’t use plastic bags.

A.How B.Why C.When D.Where

( )31.—When did basketball become an Olympic event, do you know?

—I think it was _________ 1936.

A.in B.on C.at D.by

( )32.I have realized the _________ of learning math. I must work hard.

A.difference B.experience

C.importance D.important

( )33.—I want to buy some flowers.

—There __________ a flower store across from the pay phone.

A.is B.has C.are D.have

( )34.I don’t like junk food ________ it’s not good for our health.

A.so B.but C.or D.because

( )35.I bought ________ books this morning, six Chinese books and three English books.

A.seven B.eight C.nine D.eleven

( )36.Jinan, our hometown, is one of ______ in China.

A.beautiful city

B.the most beautiful city

C.the most beautiful cities

D.most beautiful cities

( )37.—Excuse me, sir.________ is it from here to the nearest shopping mall?

—Well, only about five minutes’ walk.

A.How often B.How long C.How far D.How soon

( )38.—Why not take this sweater, Li Hua?It looks nice on you!

—I have only 20 yuan. I can’t ________ it.

A.bring B.sell C.borrow D.afford

( )39.— __________you come with me to Lang Lang’s piano concert this evening?

—I’d love to, but I have to study for my math test.

A.Should B.May C.Must D.Can

( )40.Which sign means “No photos”?

( )41.—Hello, Peter! _________?

—Not bad, thanks.

A.How high is it B.What are you doing

C.How’s it going D.What about going shopping

( )42.—Could you __________ me your ruler, Jim?

—Sure. Here you are.

A.keep B.lend C.borrow D.return

( )43.—Do you like to eat a birthday cake or noodles?

—____________.

A.Yes, I do B.No, we don’t

C.Noodles D.A medium bowl

( )44.Paul is a kind and friendly boy. ________ likes him.

A.Something B.Anything

C.Nobody D.Everybody

( )45.I’m glad that the town government will ________ a new modern hospital for the farmers.

A.wake up B.set up C.look up D.give up

( )46.(?济南平阴一模)—Time is money.

—But I think it is ________ money.

A.so important as B.more important than

C.so important than D.the same as

( )47.A direct order like “give me your pen”_______ rude.

A.smells B.looks C.feels D.sounds

( )48.The little boy is ________ lovely ________ everyone likes him.

A.such; that B.too; to C.so; that D.enough; so

( )49.—Mary, could you tell me if your mother _______ our school meeting tomorrow?

—I think she will come to school if she ______ free.

A.will take part in; will be B.takes part in; is

C.will take part in; is D.takes part in; will be

( )50.—__________ coat you’re having!

—Thank you.

A.What beautiful B.What a beautiful

C.How a beautiful D.How beautiful

( )51.________ kind and helpful to the people around us, and we will make the world a nicer place to live in.

A.Be B.Being C.To be D.Been

( )52.(2015?济南槐荫区二模)—John, do you want to join me for dinner this evening?

—____________.

A.Excuse me B.I’d love to

C.Yes, please. D.Nice to meet you

( )53.I ________ think I wouldn’t get taller.

A.used to B.be used to C.use to D.am using to

( )54.—I’m sorry to have kept you waiting long.

—Never mind. I ________ here for only a few minutes.

A.have been B.have come

C.have arrived D.waited

( )55.—Can you tell me ________ to London?

—Sure. Next month.

A.when you will travel B.when will you travel

C.when you travelled D.when did you travel

Ⅳ.完形填空阅读短文,从每题A、B、C、D四个选项中,选出一个能填入文章中相应空白处的最佳答案。(10分)

An 8-year-old child heard her parents talking about her little brother Andrew. All she knew was that he was very 56 and they had no money. Only a very expensive operation(手术)could 57 him.

One morning, the girl heard her father say to her mother, “Only a miracle(奇迹) can save Andrew now.” The girl went to her bedroom, collected all of her money and counted it 58. She hurried to a drugstore.

“How can I help you?” asked the salesman.

“I want to buy a miracle,” the girl answered. “My brother has something 59 growing inside his head. My daddy says only a miracle can save him. So how much does a miracle 60?”

“We don’t sell miracles here, my dear. I’m so sorry,” the salesman said 61.

“What kind of a miracle does your brother need?” asked a well?dressed man standing nearby.

“I don’t know,” she answered. “He’s really sick and needs an operation in his head. So I 62 all my money.”

“63 do you have?” asked the man.

“$1.11,” she answered, “but I can try and get some more.” She said again and again.

“Well, what luck,” said the man. “$1.11 is the 64 of a miracle. Let’s go to see your brother.”

That man was Dr. Carlton Armstrong, a famous brain doctor. The operation was 65 and it wasn’t long before Andrew was well again. Sometimes miracles do happen.

( )56.A.happy B.sick C.strong D.funny

( )57.A.save B.take C.make D.use

( )58.A.carefully B.early C.really D.hardly

( )59.A.nice B.clean C.bad D.beautiful

( )60.A.spend B.take C.pay D.cost

( )61.A.happily B.wisely C.sadly D.easily

( )62.A.took B.brought C.put D.sent

( )63.A.How many B.How much

C.How long D.How often

( )64.A.price B.power C.paper D.prize

( )65.A.important B.expensive

C.difficult D.successful

Ⅴ.补全对话阅读对话,从每题A、B、C、D四个选项中,选出一个最佳答案完成对话。(5分)

A: You look worried, Paul.

B: Oh, Mr. Brown. 66

A: You said you liked English. What’s the problem?

B: I can’t get the pronunciation right.

A: Well, listening can help. 67 You can listen to them at home and repeat the sentences that are difficult for you.

B: 68 But what about all the new words?I can’t remember them.

A: You can always write the new words in your notebook and study them at home. You can even study on the bus on the way to school.

B: That might really help!Thanks.

A: Can you understand when people talk to you?

B: 69 Sometimes I just don’t understand what people are saying.

A: Why don’t you join an English language club to practice speaking English?

B: Maybe I’ll go. I have one more problem. 70

A: Maybe you should find a pen pal.

B: That sounds an interesting idea to practice writing. Thanks, Mr. Brown.

( )66.A.I have a headache.

B.I have trouble learning math.

C.I’m having trouble learning English.

D.I didn’t do well in my test.

( )67.A.Why not read aloud?

B.Why don’t you borrow the teachers’ tapes?

C.What about doing more writing?

D.You’d better practice more.

( )68.A.I can.

B.I can’t do that.

C.That’s a good idea.

D.I don’t know how.

( )69.A.Yes, I can.

B.No, not always.

C.I can understand them.

D.I can’t understand them.

( )70.A.I don’t get much writing practice.

B.I don’t get much reading practice.

C.I don’t know how to spell the words.

D.I don’t know how to read books.

Ⅵ.阅读理解阅读下列短文,从每题A、B、C、D四个选项中,选出一个能回答所提问题或完成所给句子的最佳答案。(15分)

My name is Sam. I joined a club called “passing help” last month. Now let me tell you why I joined it.

One evening this May, on my way home my old car broke down(出故障). It was 25 miles from my home. I wanted to get a ride, but there was no car. I also wanted to take a taxi. But it was also hard to take a taxi. I decided to take a bus home. I went to a bus stop nearby.

After a while, a bus came, but it did not go to my town. The bus driver was a young woman. She was kind and she told me which bus I should take. I waited there for about thirty minutes, but no bus came. At last a car came to me and a woman came out of the car. She was just the bus driver.

“When I reached the bus station, I got to know that the bus to your town couldn’t come, so I returned here. I just can’t leave you here,” she said, “Get in my car and I will take you back to your home.”

“It is a long way.” I said.

“Come on, sir,” she said, “Let’s go.”

On the way she told me a story. A few days ago, there wasn’t gas(汽油) in her car. An old man drove her up to a gas station and then back to her car.

When we got to my home, I wanted to give her some money to thank her, but she didn’t accept. “I only want to help others and do something nice for somebody. Pass it along.” She said.

( )71.What happened to Sam one evening this May?

A.He lost his way.

B.His car broke down.

C.He was hurt in an accident.

D.He couldn’t reach the gas station.

( )72.Sam didn’t think of going home that evening.

A.by train B.by bus C.by car D.by taxi

( )73.From the passage, we know that the young woman was .

A.a club boss B.a taxi driver

C.a bus driver D.a gas station worker

( )74.The young woman wanted Sam to .

A.give her some money B.get on her bus

C.take her to her house D.help others just as she did

( )75.The best title(题目) of the passage is .

A.A kind old man B.Getting a ride

C.Passing help D.A broken car

Everybody is afraid of something.

Tommy, 11, is afraid of the dark. Rachel, 11, is most afraid of the big jellyfish(水母) in Australia. Morgan, 9, wishes she would stop being afraid to ride a bike on busy streets.

What’s fear? Fear is a feeling that everyone has, and that’s a good thing because fear is there to protect us. When the fear comes, it means we may meet something dangerous.

For the fear of dark, a kid could have much imagination. What’s under my bed? Is there someone breaking into my house? With the help of a parent, kids can get more comfortable in the dark. Using a night light to see that there’s nothing there can also help fight that fear.

For other fears, we needn’t fight. If you’re afraid to ride your bike on a busy street, you’re right! You should be afraid because it’s dangerous. There’s no need to fight a fear like that. Find a better place to ride.

It’s also OK for Rachel to be afraid of the big jellyfish because it’s truly dangerous. But it lives only in some waters. So when she’s not swimming in one of them, there should be no worries about the big jellyfish.

Here is some advice about fighting fears from kids.

Monique, 10, says when you’re scared, just think about happy times. Eight?year?old Jessica finds that taking a deep breath helps when you’re scared. Amanda, 10, thinks kids should talk with a parent. Dustin, 11, likes to talk with a group of friends.

( )76.What is Rachel afraid?

A.Dark.

B.The big jellyfish.

C.Talking with others.

D.Ridding a bike on busy streets.

( )77.In Paragraph 4, the writer gives ________ way(s) of helping kids fight the fear of dark.

A.one B.two C.three D.four

( )78.If you’re afraid to ride your bike on busy street, you should________ .

A.find a better place to ride

B.practicing riding a bike hard

C.ask someone to ride with you

D.take a deep breath before riding

( )79.According to the writer, ________ needs to fight his/her fear.

A.Tommy B.Rachel C.Morgan D.Dustin

( )80.What’s Monique’s advice about fighting fear?

A.Talking with friends.

B.Taking a deep breath.

C.Talking with a parent.

D.Thinking about happy times.

A smart diet, a healthy life

No matter how old your kids are, you can take steps to improve a healthy diet and to encourage good eating habits.

Tip One: Family Meals

Family meals are nice for both parents and kids. Children like to guess what they are going to have and parents get the chance to introduce new foods to children. Parents can also use the mealtime as a chance to talk with their kids about their life.

Tip Two: Healthy Snacks(零食)

Kids, especially younger ones, will eat mostly what can get at home. That’s why it’s important to have enough healthy snacks, such as fruits, vegetables, nuts, yogurt and whole?grain biscuits.

Tip Three: Being a Good Example

The best way for you to encourage healthy eating is to eat well yourself. Kids will follow the lead of the adults they see every day. By eating fruits and vegetables and avoiding fast food and sweet drinks, you are sending the right message.

Tip Four: No Shouts about Food

Parents might find themselves shouting at children to get them to have healthy foods in front of them. This in fact can make children dislike what they are asked to eat. You need to work a bit on different cooking methods(方式，方法).

Tip Five: Get Kids Included(参与)

Most kids will enjoy making the decision about food. Talk to them about making choices and planning a healthy meal. It can help them to make good decisions on their own about the foods they want to eat.

( )81.What is the author’s attitude(态度) toward snacks?

A.Snacks shouldn’t be eaten.

B.Healthy snacks can be accepted.

C.Kids can only have snacks at home.

D.It’s not necessary to have snacks at home.

( )82.The best way for parents to encourage a healthy diet is ________.

A.to have family meals B.to eat healthy snacks

C.to be a good example D.to get kids included

( )83.What does the underlined phrase “the right message” mean?

A.Being a good cook. B.Healthy eating.

C.Eating fast food. D.Cooking at home.

( )84.According to Tip Four, what should parents do if kids refuse to eat healthy food?

A.Explain how healthy it is.

B.Try cooking it in a different way.

C.Never cook the same food.

D.Ask kids to get used to its taste.

( )85.Why should parents get kids included when they make the decision about food?

A.To let kids eat anything they like.

B.To help kids become a wonderful cook.

C.To help kids make good choices by themselves.

D.To set a good example of eating healthy food.

第Ⅱ卷(非选择题共35分)

Ⅶ.选词填空(10分)

A.阅读短文,从方框中选择适当的单词填空(每词限用一次)。

Lisa got a letter. It was (86)________ her friend, Wanda. Wanda’s home is (87)________ away and near the sea. She wanted Lisa to come to her house. Lisa’s (88)________ said she could go.

Lisa (89)________ a train to Wanda’s house. They were (90) ________to see each other. The girls went to the beach, saw movies, and played many games. They had a lot of fun and enjoyed themselves.

B.阅读短文,从方框中选择适当的动词,并用其适当形式填空。有的需要加助动词或不定式符号(每词限用一次)。

Do you know Liu Wei? The armless pianist (91)________ quite famous in the past few years.

Liu Wei lost both his arms in an accident when he was ten. Two years later, he (92)________ to Beijing’s disabled swimming team and learned to swim. But soon the doctor told him not (93)________ too much sport. At the age of 19, he (94)________ to learn to play the piano with his feet. He learned it all by himself. He kept practicing for seven hours every day. In , he became the winner of China’s Got Talent Final.

Liu Wei often (95)________, “Music is like water and air to me. I can’t live without music. I will always follow my dream.”

Ⅷ.改写句子按括号中的.要求完成句子，每个空格填一个单词。(5分)

96.They have to get up early every day.(改为一般疑问句)

________ ________have to get up early every day?

97.These black shoes are sixty dollars.(就句子画线部分提问)

________ ________ are these black shoes?

98.“When are you going to Australia?” Mary asked her father.(改写句子，句意不变)

Mary asked her father ________ he ________ going to Australia.

99.This makes me think of what we did during the holidays.(改写句子，句意不变)

This ________ me ________ what we did during the holidays.

100.That village school doesn’t teach any foreign languages.(改写句子，句意不变)

Foreign languages ________ ________ in that village school.

Ⅸ.完成句子根据汉语意思完成英语句子，每个空格填一个单词。(5分)

101.谢谢你告诉我这个好消息。

________ ________telling me the good news.

102.尼泊尔地震后，无家可归的人们只好搭起帐篷，露宿街头。

After the earthquake in Nepal, the homeless people had to ________ ________ tents and live on the street.

103.济南人民正期盼着地铁R1线的开工建设。

The people in Jinan are ________ ________ to building Subway line R1.

104.孙楠在《我是歌手》中意外退赛，使人们对汪涵的睿智表现点赞。

In I am a singer, Sun Nan was out of race by________ , which made people admire Wang Han’s wise________ .

105.父母和孩子应该有更多的时间进行适当的交流，而不是整天各忙各的。

Parents and children should have more time for proper ________ ________ of being busy alone every day.

Ⅹ.任务型阅读阅读短文,按要求完成各题。(5分)

(2015?济南槐荫区三模)

The Internet has become not only a necessary but also a virtual(虚拟的) world for people. With the development of the Internet, Internet friendship has also become very popular. Online friends are those people who have known each other through the Internet. Making Internet friends is the same as making pen friends. Many famous websites offer quite warm Internet friendship. We can find many people on these websites and they share the same interests. It is difficult to make friends with someone you can’t see or feel. That is the main problem of Internet friendship. A virtual friendship would not last forever without seeing each other, but it is an advantage for some people because they are afraid to speak in pubic.

On the other hand, the chances of cheating are very high in an Internet friendship. Some people make friends on the Internet with wrong intentions(企图). So while making friends over the Internet, one has to be very careful. Here are some suggestions for you.

?Don’t give personal information, such as your telephone number, address, location, school name as well as your parents’ information, to strangers on the Internet.

?Do not exchange personal photos of you or any family member with people you meet over the Internet.

?Do not go to meet a person you have just met over the Internet. You’d better ask older or other experienced people for advice if you want to go to meet an Internet friend.

?Do not accept someone’s request if you feel he or she is dishonest.

106.根据短文内容回答问题(限5个词以内)。

What do we call people who get to know each other through the Internet?

____________________________________________________________

107.根据短文内容回答问题(限15个词以内)。

What is the main problem of Internet friendship?

____________________________________________________________

108.根据短文内容回答问题(限10个词以内)。

Why is the virtual friendship an advantage for some people?

____________________________________________________________

109.把短文中画底线的句子译成汉语。

___________________________________________________________

110.根据短文内容用一个完整的英文句子回答问题(限15个词以内)。

What is this article mainly about?

____________________________________________________________

篇4：中考英语知识点总结2023

一.英语语法重点与难点

1、as…as…结构：你和汤姆是一样好的孩子。

You’re a boy as good as Tom.=You’re as good a boy as Tom.

2、(1)too…to与 so…that sb. can’t…的句型转换：前者为简单句，主语只有一个，而后者为复合句，主语有两个，试比较：

The man was too angry to be able to speak.

The man was so angry that he wasn’t able to speak.

(2) too…to…与 not enough to句型的转换：

He is too young to get married.=He is not old enough to get married.

The book is too difficult for me to read.=

The book is not easy enough for me to read.

3、形容词原级表示比较级含义：

约翰不象迈克那么苯。

John is not so stupid as Mike.

John is less stupid than Mike.

John is cleverer than Mike.

4、用比较级表示最高级：约翰是班里最高的男生。

John is taller than any other boy in the class.

John is the tallest boy in the class.

5、the more….. the more….表示“越……越……”:

The more books you read, the wider your knowledge is.

The more food you eat, the fatter you are.

6、more and more….表示“越来……越……”:

More and more students realized the importance of a foreign language.

Our country is getting stronger and stronger.

二.中考考点—词组

1. after, in 这两个介词都可以表示“……(时间)以后”的意思

after 以过去为起点,表示过去一段时间之后,常用于过去时态的句子中?

如:She went after three days. 她是三天以后走的

in 以现在为起点,表将来一段时间以后,常用于将来时态的句子中

如:She will go in three days. 她三天以后要走

2. how long, how often, how soon

how long指多长时间,主要用来对一段时间(如three days, four weeks 等)提问?如:How long ago was it? 这是多久前的事了?

how often指每隔多久,主要用来对频率副词或状语(如once a week等)提问?如:—How often does he come here? —Once a month. 他(每隔)多久来一次?每月一次。

how soon指再过多久,主要用来对表示将来的一段时间(in an hour, in two weeks 等)提问?如:How soon can you come? 你多快能赶来?

3. few, a few, little, a little, several, some

few 和little的意思是否定的,表示“很少”或“几乎没有”;而a few和a little的意思是肯定的,表示“有一些,有一点儿”

few 和 a few修饰可数名词;little 和 a little 修饰不可数名词

several用于修饰可数名词,语意比a few和some更肯定,含有“好几个”的意思

some可修饰可数名词,也可修饰不可数名词,从数量上说,它有时相当于a few 或 a little,有时指更多一些的数量

4. the other, another

the other 指两个人或事物中的“另一个”,表示特指?如:We stood on one side of the road and they stood on the other. 我们站在街这边,他们站在那边

another着重于不定数目中的“另外一个”,表示泛指,所以常用来指至少三个中的一个?如:She has taken another of my books. 她已经拿了我的另外一本书

5. spend, take, cost, pay

spend的宾语通常是时间?金钱?在主动语态中,句子的主语必须是人,而且后面不能用动词不定式做它的宾语?如:She spent the whole evening in reading. 她把整个晚上用来读书

take常常用来指“花费”时间,句子的主语通常是表示事物的词语?如:How long will this job take you?你做这项工作要花多长时间?

cost 指花费时间?金钱或力气等,只能用表示事物的词做主语,并且不能用于被动语态?如:How much does the jacket cost?这件夹克多少钱?

pay 主要指主语(某人)买某物(或为某事)付多少钱(给某人)?如:I pay for my rooms by month. 我按月支付租金

6. among, between

between 的意思是“在……中间,在……之间”,一般指在两者之间?如:There is a table between two windows. 在两扇窗户之间有一张桌子。between 有时也表示在多于两个以上的事物之间,但那是指在每二者之间。如:the relationship between different provinces and municiplities 省市和省市之间的关系(这里是指每两个省市之间的相互关系?)

7. beat, win

这两个词都有“获胜,打败”的意思,但其后宾语不同?beat是“打败,优于”的意思,后面接人或队?如:We beat them. 我们打败了他们。

win指“赢,获胜”,后面接比赛?名次?如:We won the match/game/race/the first place. 我们赢了这场比赛(获得了第一名)。

8. agree with, agree on, agree to

agree on表示“就……取得一致意见”?如:We all agree on (making) an early start. 我们一致同意及早出发?

agree with表示“与……意见一致”,后面既可以跟表示人的名词或人称代词,也可以跟表示意见。看法的名词或what引导的从句?。如:I agree with you without reservation.我毫无保留地同意你的意见。We agree with what you said just now.我们同意你刚才所说的意见。

agree to后面不能接人,只能接“提议,计划,方案”等词句?如:I agree to the terms proposed. 我同意拟议的条件。

9. bring, take, carry,fetch

这四个词都是动词,都含有“带”或“拿”的意思,但使用的场合各不相同。

bring作“带来,拿来”解?如:Next time don’t forget to bring me a copy of your work. 下次不要忘了把一份你的作品带给我。

take是bring的对语,作“带去,拿去”解?如:Take the box away, please. 请把盒子拿走。

carry表示“运载,携带”之意,运送的方式很多,可以用车、船,也可以用手甚至用头。如:This bus is licensed to carry 100 passengers. 这辆巴士准载一百人。

fetch则表示“去拿来”的意思。如:Please fetch me the documents in that room. 请到那间房间去把文件拿来给我。

10. each, every

两词都是“每个”的意思,但着重点不同。each着重个别的情况,every着重全体,有“所有的”的意思。如:She knows each student of the class.她认识这个班里的每一个学生。She knows every student of the class.她认识这个班所有的学生。

11. no one, none

no one指“没有人(只能指人,不能用来指物)”,意思与nobody相同,作主语时不必跟of连用,如:No one believes him since he is not honest. 没有人相信他,因为他不诚实。No one else but I went. 除我以外,谁也没去。

none指“一个也没有(既可指人,也可指物)”,作主语时代替不可数名词,谓语动词用单数形式;代替可数名词,谓语动词用单、复数都可以。但在“主+系+表”结构中,如果表语为复数,则系动词要用复数形式。如:None of us are(is) afraid of difficulties. 我们谁也不怕困难。

12. go on doing, go on to do, go on with

这三个动词短语都有“继续做某事”的意思,其区别如下:go on doing表示“继续做,一直在做某事(中间无间断)”;go on to do表示“接着做某事”,即某事已做完,接着做另一件事;go on with也表示“继续做某事”,其含义是某一动作一度中止后,又继续下去。

13. too much, much too

二者都有“太,非常”之意,much too为副词词组,修饰形容词?副词,不可修饰动词。如:It’s much too cold.天气实在是太冷了。

too much作“太多”讲,有以下三种用法?

(1)作名词词组如:You have given us too much. 你给我们的太多了。

(2)作形容词词组修饰不可数名词如:Don’t drink too

much wine. 不要饮太多的酒

(3)作副词词组修饰不及物动词如:She talks too much. 她说话太多

14. happen, take place与occur

happen有“偶然”的意思,多用于客观事物?情况的发生?。如:Whatever has happened to your arm? It’s all swollen. 你的手臂怎么了?肿得好历害!

occur 指有计划地使某些事“发生”，有时强调“呈现”于人的知觉中。如:Did it occur to you to phone them about it?你难道没想到就这事给他们打个电话?

事件作主语时,happen和occur可以通用?如:The accident happened/occurred yesterday. 事故是昨天发生的。

take place 指事件发生,但常用来表示“举行”的意思,带有非偶然性?例如:The meeting took place last night.会议昨晚举行。

15. in front of, in the front of

in front of的意思是“在……前面”。如:There is a tree in front of the house.房子前面有一棵树。

in the front of的意思是“在……前部”,指在某个空间范围内的前面。如:There is a blackboard in the front of the classroom. 教室里前部有一块黑板

16. noise, voice, sound

这三个词都作“声音”解,在表示“听到声音”这个意思时,三者可以通用，但它们又各有特定的含义。

sound 作“声音”解,含义最广,指可以听到的任何声音,如:a weak sound 微弱的声

noise作“噪音,嘈杂声,吵闹声”解,指不悦耳,不和谐的声音，它既可作可数名词,也可作不可数名词。如:Another kind of pollution is noise. 另外一种污染是噪音。

voice 作“声音”解时,多指人发出的声音,包括说话声、歌声和笑声。如:He shouted at the top of voice. 他高声呼喊。有时也用于引申意义,作“意见、发言权”解。如:I have no voice in the matter. 对于这件事,我没有发言权。

17. arrive, get, reach

三者均可表示“到达”,arrive后通常接介词at(一般用于较小的地方)或 in(一般用于较大的地方)?如:We arrived at the station five minutes late. 我们晚了5分钟到车站?又如:They will arrive in Paris next Monday. 他们将于下周星期一到达巴黎?

get之后通常接介词to。如:When we got to the park, it began to rain. 我们到达公园时,就开始下雨了。

reach是及物动词(较 get更正式),其后可直接跟地点名词做宾语(不能用介词)。如:He reached Beijing yesterday. 他昨天到达北京。

三.情态动词

1.考查情态动词表示“推测”的用法

[考点快忆] 表示肯定推测的情态动词有：must“一定;准是”，may“也许;可能”，might“或许”;表示否定推测的情态动词有：can't“不可能”， couldn't“不会”，may not“也许不”，might not“或许不”;can表示推测时不用于肯定句，may表示推测时不用于疑问句。

2.考查情态动词引起的一般疑问句的答语

[考点快忆] 回答must时，肯定答语用must,否定答语用needn't或don't have to。回答need时，肯定答语用must,否定答语用needn't。回答may时，肯定答语用may，否定答语用mustn't 或can't。

3.考查情态动词的意义

[考点快忆] must “必须”;have to“不得不”;need “必须;需要”;can(could)“能;可能”;may (might) “可以;可能”;shall，will (would)“将;会;愿意;要”;should“应当”。

“had better (not) + 动词原形”表示建议;have to / has to / had to的否定，疑问形式要借助于助动词do / does / did。

四. There be 的句子结构

There be是一个“存在”句型，表示“有”的意思，

肯定句的形式为：There be + 名词(单数或复数)+地点状语或时间状语。

be动词单复数的确定，看be后边第一个名词，当所接主语为单数或不可数名词时，be动词形式为is;当所接主语为复数名词时，be动词为are;当be动词后接两个以上主语时，be动词与最临近主语保持数上的一致。意思为“某地有某人或某物”。如：

There is an eraser and two pens on the desk. 桌子上有一块橡皮和两支钢笔。

There are two pens and an eraser on the desk. 桌上有两支钢笔和一块橡皮。

(1)there be的否定句，即在be的后面加上not。

否定形式为：There be + not + (any) + 名词+地点状语。

There is not any cat in the room. 房间里没猫。

There aren't any books on the desk. 桌子上没书。

(2)there be句型的疑问句就是将be提到句首：Be there + (any) +名词+地点状语

肯定回答：Yes, there is / are. 否定回答：No, there isn't / aren't.

-Is there a dog in the picture?画上有一只狗吗

-Yes, there is. 有。

-Are there any boats in the river?河里有船吗

-No, there aren't. 没有。

(3)特殊疑问句：How many . . . are there (+地点状语)

某地有多少人或物回答用There be . . .

There's one. / There are two / three / some . . .

有时直接就用数字来回答。One. / Two . . .

-How many students are there in the classroom?教室里有多少学生

-There's only one. / There are nine. 只有一个。/有九个。

(4)如果名词是不可数名词，用：How much + 不可数名词 + is there + 地点状语

How much water is there in the cup?杯中有多少水

五. 对定语从句的考查

一.定语从句的功用和结构

在复合句中，修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。被定从句修饰的词叫做先行词。定语从句必须放在先行词之后。引导定语从句的关联词有关系代词和关系副词。例如：

This is the present that he gave me for my birthday

二.关系代词和关系副词的功用

关系代词和关系副词用来引导定于从句，在先行词和定语从句之间起纽带作用，使二者联系起来。关系代词和关系副词又在定语从句中充当一个成分。关系待客做主语，宾语，定语，关系副词可作状语。

1. 作主语：关系代词在定语从句中作主语时，从句的谓语动词的人称和数须和先行词一致。例如：

I don’t like people who talk much but do little.

The cars which are produced in Hubei Province sell very well.

2. 作宾语：She is the person that I met at the school gate yesterday.

The book that my grandmother gave me is called “The Great Escape”.

3. 作定语

关系代词whose在定语从句中作定语用。例如：

What’s the name of the young man whose sister is a doctor?

The girl whose father is a teacher studies very hard.

4. 作状语

I’ll never forget the day when I first came to Beijing.

三. 各个关系代词和关系副词的具体用法

1. who 指人，在定语从句中作主语。例如：

The person who broke the window must pay for it.

The boy who is wearing the black jacket is very clever.

2. whom指人，在定语从句中作宾语。例如：

Do you know the young man (whom) we met at the gate?

Mr Lee (whom) you want to see has come.

3. whose 指人，在定语从句中作定语。例如：

The girl whose mother is ill is staying at home today.

I know the boy whose father is a professor.

4. which指物，在定语从中作主语或宾语。例如：

A dictionary is a book which gives the meaning of words.

Here is the book (which) the teacher mentioned yesterday.

5. that多指物，有时也指人，在定语从句中作主语或宾语。例如：

I’ve read the newspaper that(which) carries the important news.

Who is the person that is reading the newspaper over there?

6. when 指时间，在定语从句中作状语。例如：

I’ll never forget the time when we worked on the farm.

He arrived in Beijing on the day when I left.

7. where 指地点，在定语从句中作状语。例如：

This is the house where we lived last year.

The factory where his father works is in the east of the city.

四. 关系代词 whom， which 在定语从句中作介词宾语时，可以和介词一起放于先行词与定语从句之间，有时为了关系紧凑也可以将 whom 与 which 与先行词紧挨着书写，而将介词置于定语从句的后面，如：

That was the room in which we had lived for ten years. = That was the room

which we had lived in for ten years.

五. 具体使用时还要注意下列问题：

1. 只能使用that,不用which 的情况：

(1) 先行词是all, few, little, nothing, everything, anything 等不定代词时。例如：

All that he said is true.

(2) 先行词被only, no, any, all,等词修饰时。例如：

He is the only foreigner that has been to that place.

(3) 先行词是序数词或被序数词修饰的词。例如：

He was the second (person) that told me the secret.

(4) 先行词是形容词最高级或被形容词最高级修饰的词。

This is the best book (that) I have read this year.

(5) 先行词既包括人又包括物时。例如：

He talked about the people and the things he remembered.

2. 只能用which，不用that 的情况：

(1) 在非限制性定语从中。例如：

The meeting was put off, which was exactly what we wanted.

(2) 定语从句由介词+关系代词引导，先行词是物时。例如：

The thing about which he is talking is of great importance.

考查的主要形式是单项填空、完型填空、短文填空和完成句子。阅读理解和书面表达肯定也要用到定语从句。

中考英语阅读理解答题技巧

1解题思路

(一)先读问题，弄清考查要点，以便能带着问题看文章，这样会心中有数，有的放矢。

(二)快速浏览全文，掌握全貌，注意发现与问题有关的信息，如果时间紧，至少要扫视一下起首段和尾段。再把标题和文章内容结合起来想一想，这样全文大意便清楚了。此时，不要忙于答题。

(三)细读原文，捕捉相关信息词，掌握短文细节内容。

2有趣味的记叙文，是学生最喜欢读的

我们要选择题材广泛、篇幅短小、知识充实、内容新颖的阅读材料。同时，在阅读材料的选择上，有目的地进行。要选择一些饶有趣味的篇章，以引起学生的阅读兴致。据调查，学生最喜欢阅读的是有故事情节的记叙文，有趣味才能保持学习的劲头，在选择的内容上要涉及日常生活方方面面的知识，这样才能扩展知识，了解文化，开阔视野。

3带着问题去读

带着问题读短文时，对短文中出现的那些与问题有关的词句，你可以用一支铅笔在短文中作些记号，以便为下一步选择作好准备，但也要注意不要每读到一个与问题有关的信息点就停下来去对照后面的问题，因为这样转来转去要耽误一些时间，另一方面有些问题往往要通过对短文的全面了解才能作出结论，而不能仅仅从一、二个信息点作出判断。

4要提高视读的速度

考阅读理解，从另一个方面来说，考的是考试速度，慢读是不行的。因此做阅读理解时，要注意培养自己快速阅读的习惯。阅读时眼球总是不断地移动——停顿——移动着。理解是在“眼停”的瞬间进行的。我们要使眼停的时间相对增加，就要扩大视读的广度，把逐词逐句的点式阅读变成一次扫描一句的线式阅读，并且把看到的东西迅速报告给大脑，形成眼脑较快的直映能力。切不可在个别难懂的词句上磨蹭，只要全篇理解了，个别难懂的词句可以根据上下文和构词法去猜测，去推断。

中考英语完形填空答题技巧介绍

11、快速通读全文，掌握短文大意

快速掌握文中的时间、地点、人物及事件。认真阅读短文开头的第一、二句，及每段的第一句，结合选项初步弄清短文写了些什么内容。准确地预测和推断短文的主要意义。

22、抓住结构、语意及逻辑三条线索，推断和预测选项

利用上下文的提示，用学过的知识和已有的生活经验，扫清部分词汇理解上的障碍。在理解

全文意思的基础上，结合文章内容对空缺句子作合乎逻辑的推理。必须弄清空缺词句的确切含义，空缺词句与其前后句的意义衔接必须自然、合理，不可出现意义断层或说东道西的情况，必须从空缺句的内部结构入手，从语法、词语固定搭配、词形变化等角度考虑，务必使所填的单词准确无误。根据词的意义和用法进行选择，重复考虑语境。上下文找线索，上下文找提示。完形填空的文章都是一个意义相关联的语篇，它围绕一个话题论述，在行文中词语重复、替代等现象是不可避免的。根据这个原则，某个空格所对应的答案很可能就在上下文中重复出现的相关词。所以，可以根据这些词之间的有机联系确定答案。

33、要特别注意语法，如单词的各种形式的变化，种类句型的结构等

单词的变化

a。名词的选择，应联系文章主题及空格前后出现的有关词，注意其性和数的一致。

b。动词的选用，要注意词义和惯用搭配，还要区分近义词之间的用法差异及所给词的形式。

c。选择介词，应注意其惯用法，特别是与动词或其他词组成的固定搭配。

d。选择代词，要注意性、数是否准确。

e。选择连词，要注意分析前后句或上下文的逻辑关系。

f。选择形容词和副词，要注意词义的区别，用于比较时，还要注意词形变化。

要注意句法题，搞清句子的种类、类型、省略和倒装

a。句子的种类包括陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。一般以考查疑问句、感叹句的词序为多见，其次是祈使句的零时态等。

b。句子的类型有简单句、并列句、复合句和并列复合句。中考考查要点是在复合句里的状语从句、宾语从句和直接/间接引语，也考查简单的定语从句。

另外还要注意固定词组、习惯用语、固定句型的积累、同义词的辨析、生活常识的运用以及中西方文化的差异。

在选择答案时，可以用择优法和排除法和例举对比法

a。择优法是把各选项代入短文中，选出在词义上符合要求，且在语法上又没有语病的答案。

b。排除法是在代入选项时如发现选项单词意义不对，或词与词搭配不妥，或存在语法错误，或与上下文有矛盾，则迅速排除不合适的选项，剩下的就是正确答案。

在完形填空的多项选择中，常常会遇到难以选择的题目。需要调动头脑里的知识“储备”，例举熟知的语言现象与之相比较，再做出明智的选择。

学好初中英语的方法和技巧

1、要有学习初中英语的态度

学霸是如何学好初中英语的呢?关键是要对初中英语这门学科产生兴趣，初中英语其实是一门非常好玩的学科，因为英语本身就是一门有意思的语言，那么如果初中生想要学好英语，就要在心理认可英语。

另外，初中生在学习的时候也单单是学习，还要有一个为之奋斗的目标，比如说学霸在学习初中英语的时候会将出国留学或者考一个好的大学作为目标，那么你在学习的时候也可以这样给自己定一个小目标，可以是这次英语考试要打多少分。

2、语法基础要打好

初中英语是为同学们以后英语的学习打基础的，上面已经提到了，单词是作为最为基础的存在。而语法同样也是初中英语之中的基础。初中英语的语法学好了，同学们日后英语的学习就会十分轻松。而且初中英语之中，同学们学习较多的就是词法，而不是句法，因为词法是英语之中较为简单的，有些同学是才刚刚接触英语不久，而中考是面对大多数的同学的，所以中考的考察的重点就是词法。而同学们所涉及到的句法都是较为简单的。

3、多做习题

书本上的知识掌握了，最重要的就是实践了。建议初中生向自己的老师咨询下，买些英语练习册，或者订阅英语报，上面的题目都很接近考试的，当初中生题目做多了，初中生就会发现其实考试中的许多题目都似曾相识，便可处变不惊。当然，一味的做题是不够的，当初中生有错题时，推荐大家准备一个错题集并记录下来，然后经常回顾，这样可以避免再犯相同的错误。遇到不会的向老师同学询问，与同学讨论亦是不错的选择，有助于加深印象。

4、重视听力和口语的练习

英语学习的最终目的是为了交流，因此在初中英语学习阶段一定要懂得开口表达。听力要达到每日一小时的练习量，方式为精听泛听相结合。而口语的练习可以借助一些口语练习软件以及固定搭档的方式，每日练习最新话题或日常生活话题，把口语和听力当做是英语学习的关键知识点。

5、扫除盲点

所谓盲点就是英语中掌握不透彻的知识，是提高成绩的绊脚石。大家对自己的盲点一定要有一个清醒的认识。建议初三一开始，就全面梳理初一初二所学知识，找出自己的知识盲点，清楚了自己的知识盲点之后，将这些盲点集合起来，继续反复扫盲，直到盲点变少、消失。

初中英语答题技巧

1、中考英语听力题，同学们要充分运用手里发的听力材料，重复听，听的过程中做做速记。捕捉的信息精确，才能答题准确。

2、单项选择题内容触及语法、词汇、惯用法、句型、口语功能等方面。此题灵敏，牵扯面广，但多数标题源于讲义或化于讲义。答题时要留意吃透语境、掌握题干的全部信息;牢记“语不离句，句不离文，语法不离语境”。用排除法选出答案。

3、语句翻译考察考生对词义的了解、词汇的拼写、词性的挑选和运用，以及固定搭配、语句的类型结构、语句的时态等方面的才能。

篇5：中考英语知识点总结完整版免费

一般现在时的用法

1) 经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频度的时间状语连用。

时间状语： every…, sometimes, at…, on Sunday I leave home for school at 7 every morning.

2) 客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。

The earth moves around the sun. Shanghai lies in the east of China.

3) 表示格言或警句中。

Pride goes before a fall. 骄者必败。注意：此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在时。例：Columbus proved that the earth is round..

4) 现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。

I don’t want so much. Ann Wang writes good English but does not speak well. 比较：Now I put the sugar in the cup. I am doing my homework now. 第一句用一般现在时，用于操作演示或指导说明的示范性动作，表示言行的瞬间动作。

再如：Now watch me, I switch on the current and stand back. 第二句中的now是进行时的标志，表示正在进行的动作的客观状况，所以后句用一般现在时。

一般过去时的用法

1)在确定的过去时间里所发生的动作或存在的状态。

时间状语有：yesterday, last week, an hour ago, the other day, in 1982等。Where did you go just now?

2)表示在过去一段时间内，经常性或习惯性的动作。

When I was a child, I often played football in the street. Whenever the Browns went during their visit, they were given a warm welcome.

3)句型：

It is time for sb. to do sth “到……时间了” “该……了” It is time sb. did sth. “时间已迟了” “早该……了” It is time for you to go to bed. 你该睡觉了。It is time you went to bed. 你早该睡觉了。would (had) rather sb. did sth. 表示’宁愿某人做某事’ I’d rather you came tomorrow.

4) wish, wonder, think, hope 等用过去时，作试探性的询问、请求、建议等。

I thought you might have some. 我以为你想要一些。

比较：一般过去时&一般现在时

一般过去时表示的动作或状态都已成为过去，现已不复存在。

Christine was an invalid all her life. (含义：她已不在人间。) Christine has been an invalid all her life. (含义：她现在还活着) Mrs. Darby lived in Kentucky for seven years. (含义：达比太太已不再住在肯塔基州。) Mrs. Darby has lived in Kentucky for seven years. ( 含义：现在还住在肯塔基州，有可能指刚离去)

注意：用过去时表示现在，表示委婉语气。

1)动词want, hope, wonder, think, intend 等。Did you want anything else? I wondered if you could help me.

2)情态动词 could, would. Could you lend me your bike?

3). used to / be used to used to + do：“过去常常”表示过去习惯性的动作或状态，但如今已不存在。

Mother used not to be so forgetful. Scarf used to take a walk. (过去常常散步)

be used to + doing：对……已感到习惯，或“习惯于”，to是介词，后需加名词或动名词。

He is used to a vegetarian diet. Scarf is used to taking a walk.(现在习惯于散步)

典型例题 ---- Your phone number again? I ___ quite catch it. ---- It’s 69568442. A. didn’t B. couldn’t C. don’t D. can’t 答案A. 本句虽没有明确的时间状语，但从语意上看出，在听的时候没有听懂这个动作发生在过去，因此应用过去时。

一般现在时的用法

1) shall用于第一人称，常被will 所代替。

will 在陈述句中用于各人称，在争求意见时常用于第二人称。Which paragraph shall I read first. Will you be at home at seven this evening?

2) be going to +不定式，表示将来。

a. 主语的意图，即将做某事。What are you going to do tomorrow?b. 计划，安排要发生的事。The play is going to be produced next month。c. 有迹象要发生的事 Look at the dark clouds, there is going to be a storm.

3) be +不定式表将来，按计划或正式安排将发生的事。

We are to discuss the report next Saturday.

4) be about to +不定式，意为马上做某事。

He is about to leave for Beijing. 注意：be about to 不能与tomorrow, next week 等表示明确将来时的时间状语连用。

5. be going to / will 用于条件句时， be going to 表将来 will 表意愿。

If you are going to make a journey, you’d better get ready for it a s soon as possible. Now if you will take off your clothes, we will fit the new clothes on you in front of the mirror.

6. be to和be going to be to 表示客观安排或受人指示而做某事。

be going to 表示主观的打算或计划。I am to play football tomorrow afternoon. (客观安排) I’m going to play football tomorrow afternoon. (主观安排)

一般现在时表将来

1)下列动词：come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return的一般现在时表将来。这主要用来表示在时间上已确定或安排好的事情。

The train leaves at orrow morning. When does the bus star? It stars in ten minutes.

2)倒装句，表示动作正在进行。

如：Here comes the bus. = The bus is coming. There goes the bell. = The bell is ringing.

3)在时间或条件句中。

him to wait for me. I’ll write to you as soon as I arrive there.

4)在动词hope, take care that, make sure that等后。

I hope they have a nice time next week. Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room.

用于现在完成时的句型

1)It is the first / second time…. thty. It was the third time that the boy had been late.

2)This is the… that…结构，that 从句要用现在完成时.

This is the best film that I’ve (ever) seen. 这是我看过的最好的电影。 This is the first time (that) I’ve heard him sing. 这是我第一次听他唱歌。

典型例题---

(1) ---Do you know our town at all? ---No, this is the first time I ___ hming

答案B. This is the first time 后面所加应为现在完成时，故选B。

(2) ---Have you ____ been to our town before? ---No, it’s the first time I ___ here. A. even, come B. even, have come C. ever, come D. ever, have come

答案D. ever意为曾经或无论何时，反意词为never，此两词常用于完成时。This is the largest fish I have ever seen. It is / was the first time +that-clause 的句型中，从句要用完成时。

注意：非延续性动词的否定形式可以与表示延续时间的状语连用。即动作不发生的状态是可以持续的。 (错)I have received his letter for a month. (对)I haven’t received his letter for almost a month.

比较since 和 for since

用来说明动作起始时间，for用来说明动作延续时间长度。

I have lived here for more than twenty years. I have lived here since I was bornM 1976. I have known Xiao Li since she was a little girl. My brother has been in the Youth League for two years. I have not heard from my uncle for a long time.

注意：并非有for 作为时间状语的句子都用现在完成时。I worked here for more than twenty years. (我现在已不在这里工作。) I have worked here for many years. (现在我仍在这里工作。) 小窍门：当现在完成时+一段时间，这一结构中，我们用下面的公式转化，很容易就能排除非延续动词在完成时中的误使。

1) (对) Tom has studied Russian for three years. = Tom began to study Russian three years ago, and is still studying it now.

2) (错) Harry has got married for six years. = Harry began to get married six years ago, and is still getting married now. 显然，第二句不对，它应改为 Harry got married six years ago. 或 Harry has been married for six years.

since的四种用法

1)since +一段时间+ ago I have been here since five months ago.

2) since +从句Great changes have taken place since you left. Considerable time

1)主语句中有一个宾语的被动语态，如：He saw her in the shop yesterday. She was seen in the shop yesterday.

2) 主语有两个宾语的被动语态 Li Lei gave me a chemistry book. I was given a chemistry book by Li Lei. A chemistry book was given to me by Li Lei.

3)主动句中含宾语补足语的句子的被动语态若宾语补足语是不带to 的不定式，变为被动语态时，该不定式前要加“to”。

此类动词为可-->He was seen to play football on the playground. 若宾语补足语是带to的不定式，那么被动语态仍保留to: Mother told me not to be late I was told not to be late环境，构成被动语态。 Coal can be used to produce electricity for agriculture and industry.

4)表示“据说”或“相信” 的词组

believe, consider, declare, expect, feel ,n report, say, see, suppose, think, understand It is said that…

据说 It is reported that… 据报道 It is believed that… 大家相信 It is hoped that… 大家希望 It is well known that… 众所周知 It is thought that… 大家认为 It is suggested that… 据建议 It is taken granted that… 被视为当然 It has been decided that… 大家决定 It must be remember that…

务必记住的是 It is said that she will leave for Wuhan on Tuesday.

延续动词与瞬间动词

1) 用于完成时的区别延续动词表示经验、环境瞬间动词用于否定句，表示“到……，才……”

He didn’t come back until ten o’clock. 他到10 点才回来。He slept until ten o’clock. 他一直睡到10点。

典型例题 ---1. You don’t need to describe her. I ___ her several times. A. had met B. have met C. met D. meet 答案B. 首先本题后句强调对现在的影响，我知道她的模样，你不用描述。再次，several times告知为反复发生的动expect elect endeavor hope fail happen help hesitate learn long mean manage offer ought plan prepare pre胶合板ask, beg, choose, expect , hate, help intend like, love, need prefer, prepare, promise, want, wish… I like to keep everything tidy. 我喜欢每件东西都保持整洁。I like you to keep everything tidy. 我喜欢你年使每件东西都保持整洁。I want to speak to Tom. 我想和汤姆谈话。I want you to speak to Tom. 我想让你和汤姆谈话。

2) 动词+疑问词+ to decide, know, consider forget, learn, remember, show, understand, see, wonder, hear, find out, explain, tell Please show us how to do that. 请演示给我们如何去做。There are so many kinds of tape-recorders on sale that I can’t make up my mind which to buy.有这么多的录音机，我都拿不定主意买哪一种。注意:疑问词带不定式在句中作成分时，谓语动词用单数。The question is how to put it into practice. 问题是怎样把它付诸实施。

不定式作补语

1) 动词+ eport request require select send state suppose tell think train trust understand urge warn

例句： a. Father will not allow us to play on the street. 父亲不让我们在街上玩耍。 b. We believe him t Find 的特殊用法：Find 后可用分批哦, declare(声称), discover, fancy(设想), feel find, guess, judge, imagine, know, prove, see(理解), show, suppose, take(以为), understand We consider Tom to be one of the best students in our class. 我们认为汤姆是班上最好的学生之一。

典型例题---Charles Babbage is generally considered ___ the first computer. A. to invent B. inventing C. to have invented D. having invented 答案：A. 由consider to do sth. 排除B、D。. 此句只说明发明这一个事实，不定式后用原形即可。而C为现在完成时，发明为点动词一般不用完成时，且此处也不强调对现在的影响，因此不选C。哦-=人们认为这本书没什么意思。

2) there be+不定式 believe, expect, intend, like, love, mean, prefer, want, wish, undrstand We didn’t expect there to be so many people there.我们没料到会有那么多人在哪里。

注意：有些动词需用as 短语做补语，如regard, think believe, take, consider. We regard Tom as our best teacher. 我们认为汤姆是我们最好的老师。Mary took him as her father

3) It’s easy (for me) to do that.我做这事太容易了听到你的声音真高兴。 It’s necessary for you to lock the car when you do not use it. 当你不用车的时候，锁车是有必要的。

4) It’s very kind of you to help us. 他帮助我们，他真好。Kind, nice, stupid, rude, clever, foolish, thoughtful, thoughtless, brave, considerate(考虑周到的), silly, selfish(自私的)

例句: It was silly of us to believe him. 我们真愚蠢，竟然相信了他。It seemed selfish of him not to give them anything. 他不给他们任何东西，这显得太自私了。

注意：1) 其他系动词如，look，appear等也可用于此句型 2) 不定式作为句子成分时，动词用单数形式。3) 当不定式作主语的句子中又有一个不定式作表语时，不能用It is… to…的句型(对)To see is to believe. 百闻不如一见。(错)It is to believe to see.

5). It’s for sb.和 It’s of sb.

1)for sb. 常用于表示事物的特征特点，表示客观形式的形容词，如easy, hard, difficult, interesting, impossible等：德，表示主观感情或态度的形容词，如good, kind, nice, clever, foolish, right。个句子。如果道理上通顺用of，不通则用for。如：You are nice. (通顺，所以应用of)。He is hard. (人是困难的，不通，因此应用for。)2) 祁使句(Ie) 祈使句往往是用来表示说话人的请求、命令、要求、建议，等等。祈使句的主语常被省略，因为这个主语很明确地是听话人“yo-祈使句的谓语用动词原形;它的否定形式是句首用Don't + 动词原形，或是Not to + 动词原形。例如：Be quiet , please ! (大家)请安静。Stand up ! 起立!Don't smoke in the office . 请不要在办公室吸烟。Don't be standing in the rain . 别站在雨里。Not to be careless when you're driving a car . 开车时不要粗心大意。3) 感叹句(Exclamato和ry Sentence)感叹句表示、惊讶等强烈的情绪。这类句子中，有很多是由What或How引起的。What 用来强调名词，How则强调形容词、副词或动词。这类句子的构成只需将所强调或是说，所感叹的对象放到句首;句子无需倒装，句子要用正常语序。当然，如果不用这种句型，而句子(无论)本身又表示了上述的种种情绪，那么该句也就成了感叹句。例如：What a fine day it is today ! 今天天气多好啊!How fine it is today ! 今天天气多好啊!What a lovely son you have !你有个多可爱的儿子啊!How lovely your son is !你的儿子多可爱

介词：in,on,under,behind,near,at,of 1). in表示”在……中“， ”在……内“。例如： in our class 在我们班上 in my bag 在我的书包里 in the desk 在桌子里 in the classroom 在教室里 2). on 表示”在……上“。例如： on the wall 在墙上 on the desk 在桌子上 on the blackboard 在黑板上 3). under表示”在……下“。例如： under the tree 在树下 under the chair 在椅子下 under the bed 在床下 4). behind表示”在……后面“。例如： behind the door 在门后 behind the tree 在树后 5). near表示”在……附近“。例如： near the teacher's desk 在讲桌附近near the bed 在床附近6). at表示”在……处“。例如： at school 在学校 at home 在家 at the door 在门口 7). of 表示”……的“。例如： a picture of our classroom 我们教室的一幅画 a map of China 一张中国地图

some和any

①在肯定句中用some.例如： There are some books on the desk.桌子上有一些书。 Lucy has some good books露西有一些好书。 ②在疑问句和否定句中用any。例如： Is there any ink in your pen?你的钢笔里有墨水吗? Do you have any brothers and sisters?你有兄弟姐妹吗? There isn't any water in the glass.杯子里没有水。 ⑵记住它们的特殊用法。 ①some亦可用于表示盼望得到对方肯定的答复或表示建议、委婉请求的疑问句中.例如： Would you like to have some apples?你想吃苹果吗? ②any也可用于肯定句中，表示”任何的“。例如： Any one of us can do this.我们当中任何一个都能做这个。 some 和any的用法是经常出现的考点，希望大家能准确地掌握它们的用法。 little的用法

a little dog 一只小狗，a little boy 一个小男孩。little常用来修饰有生命的名词。 __但little还可表示否定意义，意为”少的“，加不可数名词。 There is little time. 几乎没时间了。 There is little water in the cup. 杯中水很少。

语法

1. 名词所有格名词如要表示与后面名词的所有关系，通常用名词所有格的形式，意为”……的“。一般有以下几种形式： (1). 一般情况下在词尾加”'s“。例如： Kate's father Kate的爸爸 my mother's friend 我妈妈的朋友 (2). 如果复数名词以s结尾，只加”'“。例如： Teachers' Day 教师节 The boys' game 男孩们的游戏 (3). 如果复数名词不以s结尾，仍加”'s“。例如： Children's Day 儿童节 Women's Day 妇女节

4). 表示两个或几个共有时，所有格应加在后一个名词上。例如：

Lucy and Lily's room Lucy 和Lily的房间 Kate and Jim's father Kate 和Jim的爸爸动物和无生命事物的名词的所有格一般不在词尾加”'s“，而常常用介词of的短语来表示。 a map of China 一幅中国地图 the name of her cat 她的猫的名字 a picture of my family 我的家庭的一张照片 the door of the bedroom 卧室的门

2、代词项目人称代词物主代词指示代词反身代词

人称主格宾格形容词名词性

第一人称单数 I me my mine myself复数 we us our ours ourselves

第二人称单数 you you your yours yourself复数 you you your yours yourselves

第三人称单数 she her her hers herselfhe him his his himselfit it its its this that itself

复数 they them their theirs these those themselves

中考前提高英语成绩的方法

1、想要快速提高英语，需要有一定单词量的累积，早晨和临睡前背诵单词能快速准确地记住;

2、培养语感，语感是考试中无形的利器，借助手机或电脑听一些英语内容，无论是否听得懂，日复一日，感觉慢慢就能培养出来;

3、学习语法，跟着试卷走，试卷中的语法足够对付高考，把以往所有的试卷都复习一遍或者购买一些语法填空进行二次复习;

4、阅读英语短篇，每天多做多练与考试相似或相近的内容，并记住过错，养成不懂就问不懂就查的习惯;

5、多写多读，多读一些英语短篇可以累积很多知识，不仅可以了解语法，培养出语感外，还能快速记住单词;

6、英语写作技巧，寻找一些固定搭配，并记住它们。

如何提高初中英语成绩

1、英语文章泛读学习：学习语言类的科目，最重要的是不断地阅读，泛读是为了帮助自己提升语感，这样在做试题的时候，就能够顺口而出，不用费脑。

2、精选英文学习材料：在任何时候，我们会发现你所喜欢的就是你感兴趣的，因此，选择自己喜欢的英语学习材料，这样你才会更快速地集中记忆力。

3、英语跟读练习模式：高中的英语口语练习也是非常关键的，可以帮助你纠正一些错误，这样在今后的英语口语训练中也就更加的高效。

4、加强英语语法学习：一般很多时候，英语语法就相当于数学中的公式，如果能够很好地利用，在日常的考试和学习中，对你的英语成绩提升也是非常有帮助的。

5、坚持背诵精品文章：有时候很多老师都会采取让学生背诵英文文章，其实这个看起来很死板的教学，其实对于学生们的语感培养，都是非常有帮助的。

篇6：中考英语知识点总结完整版

英语语法知识难点(一)

(一) 形容词和副词I.要点A.形容词1、形容词的用法形容词是用来修饰、描绘名词的，通常在句中作定语、表语或宾补，有时还可作状语。如：He is honest and hardworking. I found the book interesting.

某些形容词与定冠词连用表示一类人作主语时，谓语通常用复数形式。如：The rich and the poor live in different parts of thecity.

The English like to be with their families.

多个形容词作定语修饰名词的顺序：冠词+序数词+基数词+性质状态(描述性)+形状大小+新旧老少+颜色+国籍+材料+名词。如：the second five interesting big new red Chinese wallpapers.

2、形容词比较等级的形式 (1)规则形式一般说来，单音节词及少数双音节词在后加-er; --est 来构成比较级和最高级;其他双音节词及多音节词在前加more, most.如：great-greater-greatest busy-busier-busiest important-more important-(the)mostimportant

(2)不规则形式good(well)-better-best bad(ill)-worse-worst many(much)-more-most little-less-least

(3)形容词比较等级的用法①表示两者的比较，用形容词的比较级+than. 如：Heis cleverer than the other boys. Thisone is more beautiful than that one.

②表示两者以上的比较，用”the +形容词最高级(+名词)+of(in) …“如：Heis the cleverest boy in his class.

③表示两者是同等程度，用”as +形容词原级+as“. 如：Heis as tall as I. I have as manybooks as you.

④越… 越…

例如：Themore I learn, the happier I am.

⑤ You can neverbe too careful. 越小心越好又如：Youcan never praise the teacher too highly.

你怎么赞扬这个老师也不过分。⑥ I have neverspent a more worrying day.

那一天是最令我担心的一天。Ihave never had a better dinner.

这是我吃过的最好的一顿饭。⑦ My English isno better than yours. 我的英语和你的英语都不怎么样。B.副词1、副词的种类 (1)时间副词如：ago, before,already, just, now, early, late, finally, tomorrow等

(2)地点副词如：here, there, near,around, in, out, up, down, back, away, outside等。

(3)方式副词如：carefully,angrily, badly, calmly, loudly, quickly, politely, nervously等。

(4)程度副词如：almost, nearly,much, greatly, a bit, a little, hardly, so, very等。2、副词比较等级的用法其用法与形容词相似，只是副词最高级前可省略定冠词。如：Ofall the boys he sings (the) most beautifully.

Wemust work harder.

3、某些副词在用法上的区别

(1) already, yet,still

already表示某事物已经发生，主要用于肯定句;yet表示期待某事发生，主要用于否定句和疑问句;still表示某事还在进行，主要用于肯定句和疑问句，有时也可用于否定句。如：We'vealready watched that film.

Ihaven't finished my homework yet.

Hestill works until late every night.

(2) too, as well,also, either

too,as well和 also用于肯定句和疑问句，too和as well多用于口语，一般放在句末，而also多用于书面语，一般放在句中与动词连用。either用于否定句和否定的疑问句，往往放在句末。如：Hewent there too.

Hedidn't go there either.

Ilike you as well.

Ialso went there.

(3) hard, hardly

hardly意为”几乎“与hard在词义上完全不同。如：Iwork hard every day.

Ican hardly remember that.

(4) late, lately

lately意为”最近、近来“，late意为”晚、迟“。如：Henever comes late.

Haveyou been to the museum lately?

II.例题例1Tom's father thinks he is already ____

Ahigh enough B tall enough

Cenough high C enough tall

解析：该题正确答案是B。修饰人高用tall, 而建筑物的高用high,并且enough修饰形容词要放在形容词后面。因此该题选B。例2____ the worse I seem to be.

AWhen I take more medicine

BThe more medicine I take

CTaking more of the medicine

DMore medicine taken

解析：该题正确答案为B。”the+形容词比较级+… , the +形容词比较级+…“意为越…，越…。该句意为：吃的药越多，我的病越是加重。

例3”I haven't been to London yet“.

”Ihaven't been there ____“.

Atoo Balso Ceither D neither

解析：该题正确答案为C。A和B都用于肯定句中。D-neither本身意为否定”两者都不“，而C-either则用于否定句中，意为”也“。例4Mr Smith was ____ moved at the news.

Adeep Bdeeply C very deep D quite deeply

解析：该题正确答案为B。A. deep用于副词时，修饰具体的深，如dig deep,而B-deeply则修饰表示感情色彩的词，如该题为deeply moved.另如deeply regret等。而D-quite和deeply均为副词，不能互相修饰。

(二)介词

I.要点1、介词和种类 (1)简单介词，常用的有at, in, on, about,across, before, beside, for , to, without等。 (2)复合介词，如by means of, alongwith, because of, in front of, instead of等。2、介词和其他词类的习惯搭配关系 (1)和动词的搭配，如agree with, askfor, belong to, break away from, care about等。 (2)和形容词的搭配，如afraid of, angrywith, different from, good at

(3)和名词的搭配，如answer to , keyto, reason for, cause of, visit to等.

3、介词短语可以有自己的修饰语，这种修饰语通常有right, just,badly, all, well, directly, completely等少数几个副词。如：Hecame right after dinner.

Helives directly opposite the school.

4、某些介词的意义与用法举例

(1) at, on, in(表时间) 表示时间点用at,如at four o'clock,at midnight等;表示不确定的时间或短期假日也用at,如at that time, atChristmas等。指某天用on,如onMonday, on the end of November, 指某天的朝夕用on,如on Friday morning,on the afternoon of September lst等。指长于或短于一天的时段用in,如in the afternoon, in February, in Summer, in 等。(2) between, among(表位置)between仅用于二者之间，但说三者或三者以上中的每两个之间的相互关系时，也用between, 如I'msitting between Tom and Alice.

Thevillage lies between three hills.

among用于三者或三者以上之间。如：Heis the best among the students.

(3) beside, besides

beside意为”在…旁边“，而besides意为”除…之外“。如： He sat beside me.What do you wantbesides this?

(4)in the tree, onthe tree

inthe tree 指动物或人在树上，而on the tree 指果实、树叶长在树上(5)on the way, in theway, by the way, in this way

onthe way 指在路上 in the way 指挡道 by the way 指顺便问一句 in this way 用这样的方法(6)in the corner, atthe corner

inthe corner 指在拐角内 at the corner 指在拐角外(7)in the morning, onthe morning

inthe morning 是一般说法 on the morning 特指某一天的早晨(8)by bus, on the bus

bybus 是一般说法on the bus 特指乘某一辆.

II.例题例1Do you know any other foreign language____ English?

A except B but C beside D besides

解析：A、B两项except等于but，意为”除了…“，C-beside意为”在…旁边“，不符合题意。而D-besides, 意为”除了…之外，还有“。所以该题正确答案为D。该题意为：除了英语外，你还知道别的语言吗? 例2He suddenly returned ____ a rainy night.

Aon B at C in D during

解析：我们均知道，at night这一短语，但如果night前有修饰词，表具体的夜晚，则要用介词on来修饰，故该题正确答案为A。例3I'm looking forward ____your letter.

Ato B in C at D on

解析：该题正确答案为A。look forward to 为固定搭配，意为”期望、盼望“。

(三)连词

I.要点1、连词的种类 (1)并列连词用来连接并列关系的词、短语或分句，如and, for, or,both…and, either…or, neither…nor等。 (2)从属连词用来引导从句，如that, if, whether,when, after, as soon as等。除了从属连词(引导状语从句)外，还有其它可以用来引导从句的词类。它们是连接代词和连接副词(引导名词性从句)，关系代词和关系副词(引导定语从句)。

2、常用连词举例(1)and和，并且They drank andsang all night.

(2)both…and 和，既…也…Both my parents and I went there.

(3)but 但是，而 I'msad, but he is happy.

(4)either…or 或…或…，要么…要么…Either you're wrong, or I am.

(5)for因为 Iasked him to stay, for I had something to tell him.

(6) however 然而，可是 Af first, hedidn't want to go there. Later, however, he decided to go.

(7)neither…nor 既不…也不 Neither my parents nor my aunt agrees with you.

(8)not only…but(also) 不但…而且…He not only sings well, but also dances well.

(9)or 或者，否则Hurryup, or you'll be late.Are you a worker or a doctor?

(10)so 因此，所以It'sgetting late, so I must go.

(11)although 虽然 Although it was late, they went on working.

(12)as soon as 一 …就 I'll tell him as soon as I see him.

(13)because 因为 He didn't go to school, because he was ill.

(14)unless 除非，如果不 I won't go unlessit is fine tomorrow.

(15)until 直到…He didn't leaveuntil eleven. (瞬间动词用于not… until 结构)

Hestayed there until eleven.

(16)while 当…时候，而 (表示对比)

While I stayed there, I met a friend of mine. (while后不可用瞬间动词)

Mypen is red while his is blue.

(17)for 因为 He was ill, for hedidn't come. (结论是推断出来的)

(18)since自从…I have lived heresince my uncle left.

(19)hardly… when 一… 就 I had hardly gotto the station when the train left.

(20)as far as 就… 来说As far as I know,that country is very small. You may walk as far as the lake. (一直走到湖那里)

II.例题例1John plays football ____, if not better than, David.

Aas well B as well as C so well D so well as

解析：该题意为：John踢足球如果不比David好的话，那也踢得和David一样好。和…一样好为as well as.故该题正确答案为B。例2She thought I was talking about her daughter, ____, in fact, I was talkingabout my daughter.

Awhen B where C which D while

解析：该处意为”然而“，只有while有此意思，故选D。例3Would you like a cup of coffee ____ shall we get down to business right away?

A.and B. then C. or D. otherwise

解析：该处意为”或者“，正确答案为C。

英语语法知识难点(二)

(四)动词时态、语态

I.要点1、一般现在时 (1)表示经常发生的动作或现在存在的状态，常与sometimes,always, often, every day等时间状语连用。如：Sometimes, we go swimming after school.

(2)表示客观真理、科学事实等。如：The earth goes round the sun.

2、现在进行时(1) 表示说话时或现阶段正在进行的动作，常与now, at present等时间状语连用。如：What are you doing now?

(2) 和always, continually等连用，表一种经常反复的动作，常含有某种情感。如：He is always doing good deeds.

3、现在完成时主要表示动作发生在过去，对现在仍有影响，或动作一直延续到现在，或可能还要继续下去，常与just, already, so far, once, never 等词连用。如:

Have you ever been to Beijing?

4、一般将来时表示将来某一时间要发生的动作或存在的状态，常与tomorrow, next year等连用。如：I'll meet you at the school gate tomorrow morning.

We're going to see a film next Monday.

5、一般过去时表示在过去某一时间或某一阶段内发生的动作或存在的状态，常与yesterday, last year, in , a moment ago等词连用。如： It happened many years ago.

6、过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某一时期正在发生的动作。如： What were you doing this time yesterday?

7、过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。如：The train had already left before we arrived.

8、一般过去将来时表示说话人从过去的角度来看将来发生的动作。如： He said he would come, but he didn't.

9、被动语态被动语态的时态，以give为例。

时／式

一般

进行

完成

现在

is given

are

is being

are

has

been given

have

过去

was

given

were

was

being given were

had been given

将来

shall

be given

will

shall

have been given

will

过去将来

should

be given

would

should

have been given

would

II.例题

例1 I learned that her father ____ in 1950.

A had died B died C dead D is dead

解析：该题正确答案为B。从句中的谓语动词动作虽然发生在主句谓语动词的动作之前，但因从句中有明确的过去时间状语in 1950, 所以不用过去完成时态，而用一般过去时态。

例2 The five-year-old girl ____ by her parents.

A is looked B has looked for

C is being looked for D has been looked

解析：该题正确答案为C。在带有介词的动词短语用于被动语态句中，介词不能省，否则就变成了不及物动词短语，而不能用于被动语态的句子中。

(五)动词虚拟语气

I.要点表示说的话不是事实，或者是不可能发生的情况，而是一种愿望、建议或与事实相反的假设等。一般常用于正式的书面语中。 1、虚拟语气的构成

情景

条件从句的谓语动词

主句的谓语动词

与现在事实相反

动词过去式（be要用were）

should

+动词原形

would

与过去事实相反

had +过去分词

should

+have+过去分词

would

与将来事实相反

1、动词过去时

2、should +动词原形

3、were to +动词原形

should

＋动词原形

would

注：如果条件从句谓语动词包含有were或had, should, could有时可将if省去, 但要倒装。如：Had you (If you had) invited us, we would have come to yourparty.

2、虚拟语气在各种从句的应用 (1)在主语从句中用来表示惊奇、惋惜、理应如此等，其谓语形式是”should(可省) +动词原形“，常用于以下三种句型中。句型一：It is necessary (important, natural, strange, etc) that…

句型二：It is a pity (a shame, no wonder, etc) that…

句型三：It is suggested (requested, proposed, desired, etc) that…

如： It is strange that he (should) have done that.

It is a pity that he (should) be so careless.

It is requested that we (should) be so careless.

(2)在宾语从句中用于suggest, propose, move, insist, desire, demand, request, order,command等动词后的宾语从句中，表间接的命令和建议。其谓语形式是”(should)+动词原形“。如：I suggest that we (should) go swimming.

(3)在表语从句中，表示间接的命令，要求、请求、建议、决定等，主句中的主语通常是suggestion, proposal, request, orders, idea等。从句谓语形式是”(should)+动词原形“。如：His suggestion is that we (should) leave at once.

(4)在同位语从句中，谓语形式是”(should)+动词原形“。如：We received order that the work be done at once.

(5)在It is time that…句型中，其谓语动词形式是”动词的过去式“或 ”should +动词原形“,should不可省。如：It's time (that) we went ( should go) to school.

II.例题例1 We had hoped that he ____ longer.

A stays B have stayed C stayed D would stay

解析：该题正确答案为D。had hoped表示”本希望“，同样用法的动词还有think, expect等，后面的句子需用虚拟语气例2 ”Mary wants to see you today“.

”I would rather she ____ tomorrow than today.“

A comes B came C should come D will come

解析：该题正确答案为B。would rather后面的从句需用虚拟语气，用动词过去时表示。例3 Had she been older, she ____ it better.

A had done B might have done

C might do D would do

解析：Had she been older = If she had been old. 故该题正确答案为B。

(六)短语动词

I.要点英语中有许多短语动词在意义上是一个整体，其用法有的相当于及物动词，有的相当于不及物动词，有的兼有及物动词和不及物动词的特征。英语短语动词的构成主要有以下六种：

(1)动词+介词常见的有look for, look after, send for, care about, ask for, laugh at,hear of (from), add to, lead to等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后。如：Don't laugh at others.

I didn't care about it.

(2)动词+副词常见的有give up, pick up, think over, find out, hand in, point out等。这类短语动词的宾语如果是名词，既可放在副词前边，又可放在副词后边;宾语如果是人称代词或反身代词，则要放在副词前边。如：You'll hand in your homework tomorrow.

Please don't forget to hand it in.

(3)动词+副词+介词常见的有look down upon, go on with, break away from, add up to, catchup with等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后边。如：All his money added up to no more than $100.

After a short rest, he went on with his research work.

(4)动词+名词+介词常见的有take care of, make use of, pay attention to, make fun of 等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后边。如：You should pay attention to your handwriting.

We should make full use of our time.

(5)动词+形容词常见的有leave open, set free, cut open等。这类短语动词的宾语如果是名词，则宾语可放在形容词的前边，也可放在后边;宾语如果是人称代词或反身代词，则必须放在形容词前边。如：

The prisoners were set free.

He cut it open.

(6)动词+名词常见的有take place, make friends等。这类短语动词用作不及物动词。如：This story took place three years ago.

I make friends with a lot of people.

(7)辨析give away(让给，暴露) 和 give up(放弃，停止)put away(放起，收起)和 put out (扑灭)turn up(出席，放大)和 turn on (打开)keep out(阻止)和 keep off (不让靠近)make up(编造，补上)和 make out(辨认)take off(脱，起飞)和 take out(拿出)

II.例题例1 It is wise to have some money ____ for old age.

A put away B kept up C given away D laid up

解析：该题正确答案为A。意为”存“;keep up意为”继续“;give away意为”分发“;lay up”贮藏“。例2 Here's my card. Let's keep in ____.

A touch B relation C connection D friendship

解析：该题正确答案为A. keep in touch为短语动词，意为”保持联系“。例3 ____! There's a train coming.

A Look out B Look around C Look forward D Look on

解析：该题选A. look out 意为”小心“。

(七)动词不定式

I.要点 1、不定式的形式。以动词write为例。

式｜语态

主动语态

被动语态

一般式

to write

to be written

完成式

to have written

to have been written

进行式

to be writing

完成进行式

to have been writing

2、不定式的句法功能 (1)作主语To hear from you is nice.

To be a good teacher is not easy.

不定式作主语时，为了保持句子的平衡，往往以it作形式主语，而不定式置于谓语动词后。如：It's nice to hear from you.

It's not easy to be a good teacher.

(2)作宾语通常用于want, hope, wish, like, need, hate, begin, start, remember,agree, learn, pretend, refuse, manage, help等词后。如：I forgot to lock the door.

Please remember to write to me.

(3)作表语

My job is to pick up letters.

He seemed to have heard nothing.

(4)作定语不定式作定语时，须放在它所修饰的名词或代词后。如： I have two letters to write.I have a lot of work to do.

(5)作宾补通常用于want, wish, ask, order, tell, know, help, advise, allow, cause,force等词后。如：He ordered her to leave at once.He wasforced to obey his order.

(6)作状语He got up early to catch the first bus.

He worked hard to catch up with the other students.

(7)作独立成分To tell you the truth, I told a lie.

(8) ”疑问词+不定式“结构。如：I don't know how to choose them.

I cannot decide where to go.

(9)不定式的否定式。如：I decided not to go.

(10)不定式的完成式。如：He seemed to have cleaned the room before I came in.

The boy is said to have been sent to the hospital last week.

(11)too…to 结构。如：He was too excited to go to sleep.

He was only too glad to go. (他太高兴了，乐意去)

(12)主动表被动。如：The book is easy to read.

I have a book to read.

II.例题例1 I haven't got a chair ____.

A to sit B for to sit on C to sit on D for sitting

解析：该题选C。不定式to sit on在句中作定语，修饰名词chair. 因为不定式和它所修饰的名词间是”动宾关系“，所以不定式必须是及物动词，故此处on不能省略。例2 He was made ____.

A go B gone C going D to go

解析：该题选D。make sb. do sth. 如果是被动形式，不定式do前的to不能省略。

例3 A new factory is ____ very soon.

A to be built B built

C to build D to building

解析：该题选A。is to be built意为”将要被建“。

(八)动名词

I.要点动名词既具有动词的一些特征，又具有名词的句法功能。 1、动名词的形式，以write为例。

式 | 语态

主动语态

被动语态

一般式

writing

being written

完成式

having written

having been written

否定式 not +动名词 2、动名词的用法 (1)作主语Playing football is my favorite sport.

Travelling with friends at weekend is fun.

作主语的动名词结构复杂且长时，可用it作形式主语。如： It is funtravelling with friends at weekend.

(2)作宾语I enjoy playing PC game.He gave up writing five yearsago.

(3)作表语What he hated most was doing nothing.Seeing is believing.

动名词作表语时，句子的主语常是无生命名词或what引导的名词性从句。(4)作定语There's a dining room in my school. All the people watching laughed.

(5)动名词的复合结构”物主代词(或名词的所有格)+动名词“。如：Tom's going home late made her mother angry. Would you mind my opening the window?

不过，动名词的逻辑主语在遇到以下情况时，必须用名词的普通格(或人称代词的宾格)。①无生命名词The girls were afraid of the door suddenly closing.

Fire burns better by oxygen being at work.

②有生命名词，但表泛指。Have you ever heard of girls smoking?

③两个以上的有生命的名词并列。Do you still remember my parents and me coming to see you thatday?

3.后面常接动名词的动词和短语mind, enjoy, finish, consider, practise, magine,

keep, suggest, advise, allow, permit,

be worth doing, be used to doing, be busy doing,

can't help doing, it is no good doing, it is no use doing,

look forward to doing, stick to doing, pay attention to doing,

devote to doing, lead to doing

II.例题例1 She says she doesn't feel like ____ out with you.

A going B to go C for going D went

解析：该题正确答案为A。 feel like = want, 此处like 为介词，后面要接名词或动名词作宾语例2 The garden needs ____.

A water B watering C to water D watered

解析：该题正确答案为B。 need = want = require. 如果物作主语，此三者后要接动名词或to be done这一结构作宾语。例3 Excuse me ____ you.

A interrupting B to interrupt

C interrupted D to have interrupted

解析：该题正确答案为A。excuse 后接动名词作宾语，此句中的me为动名词的逻辑主语(常用于口语中)。

(九)分词

I.要点分词既具有动词的一些特征，又具有形容和副词的句法功能。它分为现在分词和过去分词两类。现在分词和过去分词的主要差别在于现在分词有一般式和完成式，过去分词则只有一般式。现在分词表动作正在进行，表主动。过去分词及物动词表动作已经完成，表被动。过去分词不及物动词表动作已经完成，表主动。过去分词的句法功能： 1、作定语I like to read the novel written by Lu Xun.

The woman sitting beside the broken window was a friend ofmine.

2、作表语When I came into the room, I found the window was broken.

I'm interested in this book.

3、作宾语补足语I'm going to have my bike repaired.

When I walked home, I saw the thief caught by the police.

4、作状语Seen from the top of the mountain, the city looks small.

The teacher came into the classroom, followed by his students.

现在分词的句法功能。

1、作状语Seeing from the top of the mountain, I found the city wasbeautiful.

Walking along the street, they suddenly saw him.

2、作宾语I hate being spoken ill of.

He considered visiting Japan during the winter vocation.

3、作表语Seeing is believing.

The book is interesting.

4、作宾语补足语I noticed him crossing the street.

Mother caught him smoking in the kitchen.

5、作定语Do you know the man writing a letter?

The worker running a machine is my brother.

分词使用中的几个问题1、现在分词的完成式Having cleaned the room, I went out.

2、现在分词的否定式

Not having received any letter, he felt a little worried.

3、现在分词与过去分词的不同现在分词表示主动、正在，过去分词表示被动、完成I found the man killed there. I found the man standing there.

4、have结构We have the car repaired. We have repaired the car. Wehave Tom repair the car.

We have Tom repairing the car the whole morning.

5、分词作表语We were excited at the news. The football game is exciting.

6、独立主格结构It being a fine day, we went out to visit the park.

中考英语考试注意事项

一、听力

1.刚拿到试卷的时候,应该先将听力题目阅读一遍,这样在听听力的时候,也便有了目标性。

2.要仔细阅读,有时间要把选项也看一遍,找出选项间的不同。

3.养成边听边记的习惯,特别是在一些细节的方面,我们可以听的时候,顺手写在试卷的旁边,这样可以迅速的做出判断。

二、单项选择

1.注意题中暗示的有关信息。

2.找准考点。

3.注意审题,排除干扰的选项。

4.多注意平时做题中出现的易错点,考试中也是考试的一个重点。

三、阅读

1.通读全文理解大意。阅读理解应该先将文章通读一遍,这样才能做好每一个题。比如完形填空,有些选项是都可以选择的,可能是要阅读到后面的文章,才能理解前面这个空是怎么选择的。阅读理解就更不用说了,陷阱更多,需要我们仔细的去理解有关内容。

2.精读试填。这要求我们运用所学的语法和词汇知识,根据上下文的联系,对每个题做出准确的判断,考生要注意的就是统筹兼顾,上下统一,这样做出的答案准确性才会高。

3.检查。我们做完之后,可以快速的检查一遍,我们可以带着我们的答案进去检查,遇到讲不通的自然也就是错的。所以这个方法还是很有效果的,希望同学们可以试一下。

中考英语实用答题技巧

答题前，考生先将自己的姓名、准考证号填写清楚，并认真核准条形码上的准考证号、姓名，在规定的位置贴好条形码。

所有要求书写的区域都应该使用“0.5毫米黑色签字笔”，即：姓名、准考证号、改错和书面表达。注意，只接受黑色的签字笔!填涂答案的部分则只接受“2B铅笔”!填涂要求饱满、清晰、不超格。不得用铅笔或圆珠笔写作文;字体要工整、笔迹清楚。

请按照题号顺序在各题目的答题区域内作答，超出答题区域书写的答案无效;在草稿纸、试题卷上答题无效。

保持答题卡卷面清洁，不要折叠、不要弄破。

选择题需要填涂答案在答题卡上。考生可把填涂区依次分四块填涂：听力题区一块，单选题区一块，完型题区一块，阅读题区一块。不要四区一次填完，容易造成移位。

建议考生携带两支2B铅笔，一支尖，一支扁平。填涂时，考生可先用尖铅笔在答题区选项上轻点答案，遇有悬而未决的答案可点两个，最后核定时再用扁平铅笔涂黑时决定取舍，宜轻擦小点，且用力均匀。

用扁平铅笔填涂时要注意从左至右划过来，再推过去，一个来回即可，无须多次。忌点、叉、团、勾!

短文改错题的答题一定要规范、符合要求。

增加：在缺词处加一个漏词符号(∧)，并在此符号“下面”写出该加的词。

删除：把多余的词用“斜线”划掉。

修改：在错的词“下面”划一横线，并在该词“下面”写出修改后的词。

篇7：初中中考英语知识点总结免费

初中中考英语知识点归纳总结免费下载

初中英语重点知识点归纳

1词组

1. how long, how often, how soon

(1)how long指多长时间,主要用来对一段时间(如three days, four weeks 等)提问?如:How long ago was it? 这是多久前的事了?

(2)how often指每隔多久,主要用来对频率副词或状语(如once a week等)提问?如:—How often does he come here? —Once a month. 他(每隔)多久来一次?每月一次。

(3)how soon指再过多久,主要用来对表示将来的一段时间(in an hour, in two weeks 等)提问?如:How soon can you come? 你多快能赶来?

2. few, a few, little, a little, several, some

(1)few 和little的意思是否定的,表示“很少”或“几乎没有”;而a few和a little的意思是肯定的,表示“有一些,有一点儿”

(2)few 和 a few修饰可数名词;little 和 a little 修饰不可数名词

(3)several用于修饰可数名词,语意比a few和some更肯定,含有“好几个”的意思

(4)some可修饰可数名词,也可修饰不可数名词,从数量上说,它有时相当于a few 或 a little,有时指更多一些的数量

2情态动词

1.考查情态动词表示“推测”的用法

表示肯定推测的情态动词有：must“一定;准是”，may“也许;可能”，might“或许”;表示否定推测的情态动词有：can't“不可能”， couldn't“不会”，may not“也许不”，might not“或许不”;can表示推测时不用于肯定句，may表示推测时不用于疑问句。

2.考查情态动词引起的一般疑问句的答语

回答must时，肯定答语用must,否定答语用needn't或don't have to。回答need时，肯定答语用must,否定答语用needn't。回答may时，肯定答语用may，否定答语用mustn't 或can't。

3There be句型

1.在此结构中，there是引导词，在句中不能充当任何成分，也不必翻译出来。句中的主语是某人或某物，谓语动词be要与主语的数保持一致。当主语是由两个或者两者以上的名词充当时，谓语动词be要跟它邻近的那个名词的数一致。

2.There be 句型中的be不能用have来代替，但可以用lie(位于，躺),stand(矗立),exist(生存),live(生活)等词来替换。

4从句

1.though-从句

though引导的是让步状语从句，意思是“虽然……但是……”。不能和but连用，表达“虽然……,但是……”时，though和but只能用一个。

2.if-从句

If 引导的是条件状语从句，“如果;假如“。如主句用一般将来时，if从句要用一般现在时(主将从现)。

3.because-从句引导原因状语从句。

初中英语语法知识点

1句子成分

英语句子成分分七种：主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、宾语补足语。

1、主语：句子的主体，全句述说的对象。回答是“谁”或者“什么”。一般由名词、代词、不定式、动名词或从句担当，位于句首。

如：The boy needs a pen.

Smoking is bad for you = To smoke is bad for you

2、谓语：说明主语的动作或状态。回答“做(什么)”。由动词或系动词加表语担任，常置于主语后。

如：The train leaves at 6 o’clock.

She is reading.

3、宾语：表示动作的对象。回答做的是“什么”。一般由名词或代词担当，常置于谓语后。

如：He won the game.

He likes playing computer.

注意：

(1)有些及物动词带有两个宾语,一个指物(直接宾语),一个指人(间接宾语)。

间接宾语一般放在直接宾语前面。

如：He wrote me a letter . (他给我写了一封信)

(2)有时可把介词to或for加在间接宾语前构成短语,放在直接宾语后面,来强调间接宾语。

如：He wrote a letter to me . (他给我写了一封信)

4、表语：用以表述主语的特征、状态、身份等。回答是“什么”或者“怎么样”。一般由名词或形容词担任，置于系动词或be动词之后。

如：He is a student. We are tired.

注意：除了be 系动词外，还有一些动词也可以用作系动词，

(1)表感官的动词: feel, smell, taste, sound, look, appear, seem 等。

(2)表转变变化的动词: become, get, grow, turn, go等。

(3)表延续的动词: remain, keep, hold, stay, rest等。

5、定语：对名词或代词起修饰、限定作用的词、短语或句子。

如：The black bike is mine.(形容词)

The boy in blue is Jim.(介词短语)

I have nothing to do today.(动词不定式)

注意：

(1)当定语修饰不定代词如：nothing , anything , everything , something等时，定语要放在其后作后置定语。例如： I tell him something interesting.

(2)不定式、短语或从句作定语时，也放在被修饰的名词之后。

例如：The boys who are in the room are playing games.

6、状语：用以修饰动词、形容词、副词及全句，通常由形容词、代词、数词等担任位置灵活。

(1)修饰形容词或副词时，通常位于被修饰的词之前;

如：I am very sorry.

(2)表示时间、地点、目的的状语一般位于句子两头，强调时放在句首。

如：In order to cheer him up, I told him the truth.

They are writing English in the classroom.

(3)一些表示不确定时间(如：often)或程度(如：almost)的副词状语通常位于be动词、助动词、情态动词之后，动词之前。

如：We often help him.

He is always late for class.

7、补语：补充说明宾语怎么样或干什么,。由n./adj./介宾/分词/不定式等担任。常位于宾语后。

如：He made me sad.(形容词)

She asks me to take an umbrella.(不定式)

The war made him a soldier.(名词)

I find him at home.(介词短语)

I saw a cat running along the wall.(分词)

8、同位语：通常紧跟在名词、代词后面,进一步说明它的情况, 它可以由名词、代词、名词性短语或从句充当。

如：Tom, our monitor, is a handsome boy.

I myself will do the experiment.

She is the oldest among them six.

2数词的用法

1、表示年份：: twenty thousand and two ; 1976 : nineteen seventy-six.

2、表示日期： 12月1日: Dec.1st或the first of December;11月8日: Nov. 8th, 2002.

3、表示时刻： 5：15→ five fifteen或a quarter past five ; 8：30→ eight thirty或half past

eight ; 10：45→ ten forty-five或a quarter to eleven.

4、表示编号：Room 105→Room one 0 five; Bus No.13→Bus Number Thirteen; P.5→Page Five;Tel.No.7658659→Telephone Number seven-six-five-eight-six-five-nine

5、小数的读法：5.7→ five point seven, 0.16 →zero point one six.

6、“半”的表达： 1/2→half, 半小时→half an hour, 1.5小时→one and a half hours或one hour and a half.

7、序数词前面加the时,表示顺序,加a/an时表示“再一、又一”。

3现在完成时

1、概念：过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果，或从过去已经开始，持续到现在的动作或状态。

2、句子结构：have/has + done

3、时间状语：recently, lately, since…for…,in the past few years, etc.

4、否定形式：have/has + not +done.

5、一般疑问句：have或has。

4现在进行时

1、概念：表示现阶段或说话时正在进行的动作及行为。

2、时间状语：now, at this time, these days, etc.

3、基本结构：am/is/are+doing

否定形式：am/is/are+not+doing.

一般疑问句：把be动词放于句首。

4、用法：

(1)表示现在(指说话人说话时)正在发生的事情。

例如： We are waiting for you. 我们正在等你。

(2)习惯进行：表示长期的或重复性的动作，说话时动作未必正在进行。

例如：Mr. Green is writing another novel. 他在写另一部小说。(说话时并未在写，只处于写作的状态。)

(3)表示渐变，这样的动词有：get, grow, become, turn, run, go, begin等。

例如：The leaves are turning red. 叶子在变红。

It's getting warmer and warmer. 天越来越热了。

(4)与always, constantly, forever 等词连用，表示反复发生的动作或持续存在的状态，往往带有说话人的主观色彩。

例：You are always changing your mind. 你老是改变主意。

(5)用现在进行时表示将来

下列动词come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return等瞬时动词的现在进行时可以表示将来。

例：I'm leaving tomorrow. 明天我要走了。

Are you staying here till next week? 你会在这儿呆到下周吗?

5一般现在时

1、概念：指经常、反复发生的动作或行为及现在的某种状况。

2、时间状语：always,usually,often,sometimes,every week(day,year,month…),once a week,on Sundays,

3、基本结构：动词+原形(如主语为第三人称单数，动词上要加(e)S)

4、否定形式：am/is/are+not;此时态的谓语动词若为行为动词，则在其前加don't,如主语为第三人称单数，则用doesn't，同时还原行为动词。

5、一般疑问句：把be动词放于句首;用助动词do提问，如主语为第三人称单数，则用does，同时，还原行为动词。

6一般过去时

1、概念：过去某个时间里发生的动作或状态;过去习惯性、经常性的动作、行为。

2、时间状语：ago,yesterday,the day before yesterday,last week(year,night,month…),in 1989,just now,at the age of 5,one day,long long ago,once upon a time,etc.

3、基本结构：含有Be动词主语+was/were+.不含有be动词：主语+动词过去式+.

4、否定句：带be:主语+was/were not+动词原形+.不带be：主语+didn't+动词原形+.

5、一般疑问句：含be动词was或were放于句首;

不含be动词用助动词do的过去式did提问，同时还原行为动词原型。

7过去进行时

1、概念：表示过去某段时间或某一时刻正在发生或进行的行为或动作。

2、时间状语：at this time yesterday,at that time或以when引导的谓语动词是一般过去时的时间状语等。

3、基本结构：was/were+doing

4、否定形式：was/were+not+doing.

5、一般疑问句：把was或were放于句首。

8一般将来时

1、概念：表示将要发生的动作或存在的状态及打算、计划或准备做某事。

2、时间状语：tomorrow,next day(week,month,year…),soon,in a few minutes,by…,the day after tomorrow,etc.

3、基本结构：am/is/are+going to+do;will/shall+do.

4、否定形式：am/is/are+not+going to;在行为动词前加will/shall(will适用于所有人称，shall只用于第一人称)

5、一般疑问句：be放于句首;will/shall提到句首。

9过去将来时

1、概念：立足于过去某一时刻，从过去看将来，常用于宾语从句中。

2、时间状语：the next day(morning,year…),the following month(week…),etc.

3、基本结构：was/were+going to+do;would/should+do.

4、否定形式：was/were+not+going to+do;would/should+not+do.

5、一般疑问句：was或were放于句首;would/should提到句首。

初中英语学习计划

自主学习是与传统的接受学习相对应的一种现代化的学习方式，而自主学习能力就是学生能够以自身为主体，自己自主，不受别人的支配，不受外界的干扰进行学习的能力。自主学习打破了过去传统的教学模式，让学生能够进行自主的学习，学生是整个自主学习的主体，教师只是辅导或者是引导的作用那个，调动学生学习的积极主动性，帮助初中生学习英语打造良好的氛围。

一、培养初中生自主学习能力的必要性

1.学生自身发展的需要

科技在不断地发展进步，知识的更新速度也越来越快，仅仅只是靠着在学校学习的时间已经不能满足自身发展的需要，学习也不再受到时间以及空间的限制了，学习自然而然的也就变成了主动性的学习，学习效果的好坏也就取决于学生自身的学习能力。所以培养学生自主学习能力是在为学生长远的发展做打算。另外，终身学习的理念逐渐的发展起来，在学生走出学校走向社会后的主要学习方式就是自主学习，如果学生没有自主学习能力就没有办法进行学习，个体的发展也会受到极大的限制。

2.提高学生学习效率及效果

自主学校主要就是通过自我控制、克服困难等手段来进行的，自主学习的主体的求知欲强、学习目标明确、能够在多种学习方法中寻找到最适合自己的学习方法，能够充分的发现自己的问题，并且及时的改正，而且也能够使得学生在课堂上注意力更加集中，能够有效地提高学生的学习效率以及学习效果。

3.激发初中学生学习英语的兴趣

提升自主学习能力不仅能够有效的提高学生的学习效率，而且还能够充分的激发出学生的学习兴趣。在学习中，除了各种主观因素以外，兴趣也在初中英语学习中占很重要的作用，学生只有对英语感兴趣，才能产生一种求知欲，进而自主的投身到初中英语的学习中去，达到更好的学习效果。

二、培养初中生自主学习能力的措施

1.帮助学生提高学习英语兴趣，培养学生自主学习能力

英语学科是一门语言教学的学科，而初中英语更是为以后高中英语甚至是大学英语打下坚实基础的重要阶段，学生对于英语学习的兴趣不仅能够提高学生的学习效率还能在很大程度上帮助学生学习于英语相关的其他知识。在进行教学活动时，教师应该运用多样化的教学方式来激发和提高学生学习英语的兴趣，使学生能够全身心的投入到教师的教学当中去。这样在帮助学生培养自主学习能力的同时，还能够有效的提高教师教学的质量以及教学效率。

例如：在英语教学活动进行时，教师可以在教学中可以将中国的一些古谚语进行翻译，介绍给同学。“A bad beginning makes a bad ending”这句英文的意思就是恶其始者并恶其终，这样不仅能够增加学生的词汇积累量，帮助学生提高写作能力，还能够有效的激发起学生学习英语的兴趣，另外借这句短语，教师还能够引出“beginning”以及“ending”等词语的应用，帮助学生加深词汇的记忆能力。

2.引导学生建立自主学习计划，培养学生自主学习能力

学习计划在学生自主学习中遇着重要的作用，对于培养学生自主学习能力也有帮助作用。在教师进行教学的过程中，可以引导学生根据自己英语的掌握能力制定适合自己的英语学习计划表以及英语学习目标，来逐渐的培养学生自主学习习惯以及能力。传统的英语教学中，教学的进度完全由教师掌握，学生也是盲目跟从教师制定的学习目标以及学习计划，没有自主学习能力，这样是非常不利于初中英语的学习，对于学生自主能力的培养也起了一定的阻碍作用。因此教师在教学中应该时刻注意引导学生根据自身特点以及掌握程度去建立适合自己的计划表，帮助学生形成自主学习的习惯以及提高学生自主学习的能力。

例如：学生在建立计划表的时候可以分为长期计划表以及短期计划表。在学生进行某一单元词汇背诵时，遇到了interesting以及Interesting相关的其他英语词汇interest、interested等等，学生就可以根据这些词汇制定一个比较灵活的短期计划表来对词汇进行记忆。在对一些重点的短语以及词组如“remember to do something”“remember doing something ”以及“regret to do something”“regret doing something”进行记忆的时候，就应该制定长期的计划表，便于对这些词组短语进行长期的记忆以及理解与应用。

3.创建自主学习的环境，培养学生自主学习能力

创建自主学习学习的环境，形成自主学习和探究的氛围，建立良好的师生关系，与学生之间成为朋友，参与到学生中去，积极与学生之间进行沟通与交流，形成良好的和谐的师生关系。在进行教学活动时，教师应该让学生真正的参与到学习的过程中来，在课堂上教师应该先给学生留有一定的时间，让学生自由思考，自由探究，促进英语水平的不断提高，加快自主学习能力的培养进程。

例如：在对“can not help to do something”和“can not doing something”进行学习之后，教师应该给学生留下自由思考的时间，思考两者之间到底存在哪些不同，然后进行自由分组讨论，由学生自己创设语境上台表演，表达自己对于这两个词组的区别的理解，这样会使得整个初中英语的教学课堂一直是处在轻松欢乐但是注意力却高度集中的课堂，让学生感受到来自英语的魅力，使原先枯燥乏味的英语课远离学生。

三、结语

综上所述，自主学习能力的培养是在教师有目的的引导以及帮助下逐渐形成。自主学习能力能够帮助学生在日后的工作以及终生学习中受益良多，但是自主学习能力的培养也绝非是一朝一夕之事，所以教师应该不断的提高自身的综合素质，在引导和帮助学生形成自主学习能力的过程中不断地反思和总结，不断地提高，促进学生自主学习能力的培养，提高学生学习以及教师教学的质量和效率。

篇8：中考英语知识点总结版

1英语词类

十种：名词、形容词、代词、数词、冠词、动词、副词、介词、连词、感叹词。

1、名词(n.)：表示人、事物、地点或抽象概念的名称。如：boy,morning,bag,ball,class,orange.

2、代词(pron.)：主要用来代替名词。如：who,she,you,it.

3、形容词(adj..)：表示人或事物的性质或特征。如：good,right,white,orange.

4、数词(num.)：表示数目或事物的顺序。如：one,two,three,first,second,third,fourth.

5、动词(v.)：表示动作或状态。如：am,is,are,have,see.

6、副词(adv.)：修饰动词、形容词或其他副词,说明时间、地点、程度等。如：now,very,here,often,quietly,slowly.

7、冠词(art..)：用在名词前,帮助说明名词。如：a,an,the.

8、介词(prep.)：表示它后面的名词或代词与其他句子成分的关系。如in,on,from,above,behind.

9、连词(conj.)：用来连接词、短语或句子。如and,but,before.

10、感叹词(interj..)表示喜、怒、哀、乐等感情。如：oh,well,hi,hello.

2句子成分

1、主语是句子所要说的人或事物,回答是“谁”或者“什么”。通常用名词或代词担任。如：I’m Miss Green.(我是格林小姐)

2、谓语动词说明主语的动作或状态,回答“做(什么)”。主要由动词担任。如：Jack cleans the room every day. (杰克每天打扫房间)

3、表语在系动词之后,说明主语的身份或特征,回答是“什么”或者“怎么样”。通常由名词、代词或形容词担任。如：My name is Ping ping .(我的名字叫萍萍)

4、宾语表示及物动词的对象或结果,回答做的是“什么”。通常由名词或代词担任。如：He can spell the word.(他能拼这个词)

有些及物动词带有两个宾语,一个指物,一个指人。指物的叫直接宾语,指人的叫间接宾语。间接宾语一般放在直接宾语的前面。如：He wrote me a letter . (他给我写了一封信)

有时可把介词to或for加在间接宾语前构成短语,放在直接宾语后面,来强调间接宾语。如：He wrote a letter to me . (他给我写了一封信)

5、定语修饰名词或代词,通常由形容词、代词、数词等担任。如：Shanghai is a big city .(上海是个大城市)

6、状语用来修饰动词、形容词、副词,通常由副词担任。如：He works hard .(他工作努力)

7、宾语补足语用来说明宾语怎么样或干什么,通常由形容词或动词充当。如：They usually keep their classroom clean.(他们通常让教室保持清洁) / He often helps me do my lessons.(他常常帮我做功课) / The teacher wanted me to learn French all by myself.(老师要我自学法语)

3八种基本时态

1.一般现在时

概念:表示经常发生的动作或经常存在的状态。

常和always,often,usually,sometimes,every day等表时间的状语连用。

构成：1)主语+be(am/are/is)+……

2)主语+实义动词/三单动词+…

2.一般过去时

概念:1)表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

常和表示过去的时间状语连用.如:yesterday，last week，in ，two days ago等.

2)也可表示过去经常或反复发生的动作.

构成:1)主语+be(was/were)+……

2)主语+实义动词过去式+

3.现在进行时

概念:表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作.

构成:主语+助动词be(am/are/is+动词-ing形式构成.

4.过去进行时

概念:表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作.这一特定的过去时间除了有上下文暗示外,一般用时间状语来表示.

构成:主语+助动词be(was/were)+动词-ing形式构成.

5.一般将来时

概念:表示将来某个时间要发生的动作或存在的状态,也表示将来经常或反复发生的动作,常与表示将来的时间状语连用,如:tomorrow,next week,next year,in the future等.

构成:1)主语+助动词will+动原+…

2)主语+be goingto+动原+….

6.过去将来时

概念:表示在过去将来的某一时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

构成:1)主语(第一人称)+助动词should+动原+…

2)主语+would+动原+….

3)主语+was/ were going to+动原…

用法:过去将来时除了上下文暗示外,一般常用在间接引语中,主句谓语动词为过去时态.

7.现在完成时

构成:主语+助动词(have/has)+动词过去分词+…

用法:表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果.

8.过去完成时

构成:主语+助动词had+动词过去分词+…

用法

表示过去在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作.它表示的动作发生的时间是”过去的过去”.表示过去某一时间可用by,before等构成的短语,也可用when,before,等引导的从句或者通过上下文表示.

4构词法

1、合成法：如：spaceship,headache,basketball,playground等等。

2、派生法：

(1)派生名词：①动词+er/or②动词+ing③动词+(t)ion④形容词+ness⑤其他,如：inventor,learner,swimming,congratulation,kindness,carelessness,knowledge

(2)派生形容词：①名词+y②名词+ful③动词+ing/ed④friendly⑤dangerous⑥Chinese;Japanese⑦English⑧French⑨German⑩国名+(i)an如：snowy,sunny,hopeful,beautiful,interesting,follwing,daily(每日的),nervous,delicious

(3)派生副词：①形容词+ly②其它,如：slowly,angrily,full→fully,good→well,possible→possibly等等。

3、转换法：

(1)形容词→动词,如：dry(干燥的)→dry(弄干),clean(干净的)→clean(打扫,弄干净),等等。

(2)动词→名词,如：look,walk,rest,work,study,swim,go,talk等等。

(3)名词→动词,如：hand(手)→(传递),face(脸)→(面对)等等。

(4)形容词→副词,如：early→early,fast→fast等等。

(5)副词→连词,如：when(什么时候)→(当……时候),等等。

(6)介词→副词,如：in(到……里)→(在里面;在家),on(在…上)→(进行,继续),等等。

篇9：中考英语知识点总结版

英语语法知识难点(一)

某些形容词与定冠词连用表示一类人作主语时，谓语通常用复数形式。如：The rich and the poor live in different parts of thecity.

The English like to be with their families.

(2)不规则形式good(well)-better-best bad(ill)-worse-worst many(much)-more-most little-less-least

(3)形容词比较等级的用法①表示两者的比较，用形容词的比较级+than. 如：Heis cleverer than the other boys. Thisone is more beautiful than that one.

②表示两者以上的比较，用”the +形容词最高级(+名词)+of(in) …“如：Heis the cleverest boy in his class.

③表示两者是同等程度，用”as +形容词原级+as“. 如：Heis as tall as I. I have as manybooks as you.

④越… 越…

例如：Themore I learn, the happier I am.

⑤ You can neverbe too careful. 越小心越好又如：Youcan never praise the teacher too highly.

你怎么赞扬这个老师也不过分。⑥ I have neverspent a more worrying day.

那一天是最令我担心的一天。Ihave never had a better dinner.

(2)地点副词如：here, there, near,around, in, out, up, down, back, away, outside等。

(3)方式副词如：carefully,angrily, badly, calmly, loudly, quickly, politely, nervously等。

Wemust work harder.

3、某些副词在用法上的区别

(1) already, yet,still

Ihaven't finished my homework yet.

Hestill works until late every night.

(2) too, as well,also, either

Hedidn't go there either.

Ilike you as well.

Ialso went there.

(3) hard, hardly

hardly意为”几乎“与hard在词义上完全不同。如：Iwork hard every day.

Ican hardly remember that.

(4) late, lately

lately意为”最近、近来“，late意为”晚、迟“。如：Henever comes late.

Haveyou been to the museum lately?

II.例题例1Tom's father thinks he is already ____

Ahigh enough B tall enough

Cenough high C enough tall

解析：该题正确答案是B。修饰人高用tall, 而建筑物的高用high,并且enough修饰形容词要放在形容词后面。因此该题选B。例2____ the worse I seem to be.

AWhen I take more medicine

BThe more medicine I take

CTaking more of the medicine

DMore medicine taken

解析：该题正确答案为B。”the+形容词比较级+… , the +形容词比较级+…“意为越…，越…。该句意为：吃的药越多，我的病越是加重。

例3”I haven't been to London yet“.

”Ihaven't been there ____“.

Atoo Balso Ceither D neither

Adeep Bdeeply C very deep D quite deeply

(二)介词

(3)和名词的搭配，如answer to , keyto, reason for, cause of, visit to等.

3、介词短语可以有自己的修饰语，这种修饰语通常有right, just,badly, all, well, directly, completely等少数几个副词。如：Hecame right after dinner.

Helives directly opposite the school.

4、某些介词的意义与用法举例

Thevillage lies between three hills.

among用于三者或三者以上之间。如：Heis the best among the students.

(3) beside, besides

beside意为”在…旁边“，而besides意为”除…之外“。如： He sat beside me.What do you wantbesides this?

(4)in the tree, onthe tree

inthe tree 指动物或人在树上，而on the tree 指果实、树叶长在树上(5)on the way, in theway, by the way, in this way

onthe way 指在路上 in the way 指挡道 by the way 指顺便问一句 in this way 用这样的方法(6)in the corner, atthe corner

inthe corner 指在拐角内 at the corner 指在拐角外(7)in the morning, onthe morning

inthe morning 是一般说法 on the morning 特指某一天的早晨(8)by bus, on the bus

bybus 是一般说法on the bus 特指乘某一辆.

II.例题例1Do you know any other foreign language____ English?

A except B but C beside D besides

Aon B at C in D during

Ato B in C at D on

解析：该题正确答案为A。look forward to 为固定搭配，意为”期望、盼望“。

(三)连词

2、常用连词举例(1)and和，并且They drank andsang all night.

(2)both…and 和，既…也…Both my parents and I went there.

(3)but 但是，而 I'msad, but he is happy.

(4)either…or 或…或…，要么…要么…Either you're wrong, or I am.

(5)for因为 Iasked him to stay, for I had something to tell him.

(6) however 然而，可是 Af first, hedidn't want to go there. Later, however, he decided to go.

(7)neither…nor 既不…也不 Neither my parents nor my aunt agrees with you.

(8)not only…but(also) 不但…而且…He not only sings well, but also dances well.

(9)or 或者，否则Hurryup, or you'll be late.Are you a worker or a doctor?

(10)so 因此，所以It'sgetting late, so I must go.

(11)although 虽然 Although it was late, they went on working.

(12)as soon as 一 …就 I'll tell him as soon as I see him.

(13)because 因为 He didn't go to school, because he was ill.

(14)unless 除非，如果不 I won't go unlessit is fine tomorrow.

(15)until 直到…He didn't leaveuntil eleven. (瞬间动词用于not… until 结构)

Hestayed there until eleven.

(16)while 当…时候，而 (表示对比)

While I stayed there, I met a friend of mine. (while后不可用瞬间动词)

Mypen is red while his is blue.

(17)for 因为 He was ill, for hedidn't come. (结论是推断出来的)

(18)since自从…I have lived heresince my uncle left.

(19)hardly… when 一… 就 I had hardly gotto the station when the train left.

(20)as far as 就… 来说As far as I know,that country is very small. You may walk as far as the lake. (一直走到湖那里)

II.例题例1John plays football ____, if not better than, David.

Aas well B as well as C so well D so well as

Awhen B where C which D while

解析：该处意为”然而“，只有while有此意思，故选D。例3Would you like a cup of coffee ____ shall we get down to business right away?

A.and B. then C. or D. otherwise

解析：该处意为”或者“，正确答案为C。

英语语法知识难点(二)

(四)动词时态、语态

I.要点1、一般现在时 (1)表示经常发生的动作或现在存在的状态，常与sometimes,always, often, every day等时间状语连用。如：Sometimes, we go swimming after school.

(2)表示客观真理、科学事实等。如：The earth goes round the sun.

2、现在进行时(1) 表示说话时或现阶段正在进行的动作，常与now, at present等时间状语连用。如：What are you doing now?

(2) 和always, continually等连用，表一种经常反复的动作，常含有某种情感。如：He is always doing good deeds.

Have you ever been to Beijing?

4、一般将来时表示将来某一时间要发生的动作或存在的状态，常与tomorrow, next year等连用。如：I'll meet you at the school gate tomorrow morning.

We're going to see a film next Monday.

5、一般过去时表示在过去某一时间或某一阶段内发生的动作或存在的状态，常与yesterday, last year, in 1998, a moment ago等词连用。如： It happened many years ago.

6、过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某一时期正在发生的动作。如： What were you doing this time yesterday?

7、过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。如：The train had already left before we arrived.

8、一般过去将来时表示说话人从过去的角度来看将来发生的动作。如： He said he would come, but he didn't.

9、被动语态被动语态的时态，以give为例。

时／式

一般

进行

完成

现在

is given

are

is being

are

has

been given

have

过去

was

given

were

was

being given were

had been given

将来

shall

be given

will

shall

have been given

will

过去将来

should

be given

would

should

have been given

would

II.例题

例1 I learned that her father ____ in 1950.

A had died B died C dead D is dead

例2 The five-year-old girl ____ by her parents.

A is looked B has looked for

C is being looked for D has been looked

解析：该题正确答案为C。在带有介词的动词短语用于被动语态句中，介词不能省，否则就变成了不及物动词短语，而不能用于被动语态的句子中。

(五)动词虚拟语气

I.要点表示说的话不是事实，或者是不可能发生的情况，而是一种愿望、建议或与事实相反的假设等。一般常用于正式的书面语中。 1、虚拟语气的构成

情景

条件从句的谓语动词

主句的谓语动词

与现在事实相反

动词过去式（be要用were）

should

+动词原形

would

与过去事实相反

had +过去分词

should

+have+过去分词

would

与将来事实相反

1、动词过去时

2、should +动词原形

3、were to +动词原形

should

＋动词原形

would

注：如果条件从句谓语动词包含有were或had, should, could有时可将if省去, 但要倒装。如：Had you (If you had) invited us, we would have come to yourparty.

句型二：It is a pity (a shame, no wonder, etc) that…

句型三：It is suggested (requested, proposed, desired, etc) that…

如： It is strange that he (should) have done that.

It is a pity that he (should) be so careless.

It is requested that we (should) be so careless.

(4)在同位语从句中，谓语形式是”(should)+动词原形“。如：We received order that the work be done at once.

(5)在It is time that…句型中，其谓语动词形式是”动词的过去式“或 ”should +动词原形“,should不可省。如：It's time (that) we went ( should go) to school.

II.例题例1 We had hoped that he ____ longer.

A stays B have stayed C stayed D would stay

解析：该题正确答案为D。had hoped表示”本希望“，同样用法的动词还有think, expect等，后面的句子需用虚拟语气例2 ”Mary wants to see you today“.

”I would rather she ____ tomorrow than today.“

A comes B came C should come D will come

解析：该题正确答案为B。would rather后面的从句需用虚拟语气，用动词过去时表示。例3 Had she been older, she ____ it better.

A had done B might have done

C might do D would do

解析：Had she been older = If she had been old. 故该题正确答案为B。

(六)短语动词

I didn't care about it.

Please don't forget to hand it in.

After a short rest, he went on with his research work.

We should make full use of our time.

The prisoners were set free.

He cut it open.

(6)动词+名词常见的有take place, make friends等。这类短语动词用作不及物动词。如：This story took place three years ago.

I make friends with a lot of people.

(七)动词不定式

I.要点 1、不定式的形式。以动词write为例。

式｜语态

主动语态

被动语态

一般式

to write

to be written

完成式

to have written

to have been written

进行式

to be writing

完成进行式

to have been writing

2、不定式的句法功能 (1)作主语To hear from you is nice.

To be a good teacher is not easy.

不定式作主语时，为了保持句子的平衡，往往以it作形式主语，而不定式置于谓语动词后。如：It's nice to hear from you.

It's not easy to be a good teacher.

(2)作宾语通常用于want, hope, wish, like, need, hate, begin, start, remember,agree, learn, pretend, refuse, manage, help等词后。如：I forgot to lock the door.

Please remember to write to me.

(3)作表语

My job is to pick up letters.

He seemed to have heard nothing.

(4)作定语不定式作定语时，须放在它所修饰的名词或代词后。如： I have two letters to write.I have a lot of work to do.

(5)作宾补通常用于want, wish, ask, order, tell, know, help, advise, allow, cause,force等词后。如：He ordered her to leave at once.He wasforced to obey his order.

(6)作状语He got up early to catch the first bus.

He worked hard to catch up with the other students.

(7)作独立成分To tell you the truth, I told a lie.

(8) ”疑问词+不定式“结构。如：I don't know how to choose them.

I cannot decide where to go.

(9)不定式的否定式。如：I decided not to go.

(10)不定式的完成式。如：He seemed to have cleaned the room before I came in.

The boy is said to have been sent to the hospital last week.

(11)too…to 结构。如：He was too excited to go to sleep.

He was only too glad to go. (他太高兴了，乐意去)

(12)主动表被动。如：The book is easy to read.

I have a book to read.

II.例题例1 I haven't got a chair ____.

A to sit B for to sit on C to sit on D for sitting

A go B gone C going D to go

解析：该题选D。make sb. do sth. 如果是被动形式，不定式do前的to不能省略。

例3 A new factory is ____ very soon.

A to be built B built

C to build D to building

解析：该题选A。is to be built意为”将要被建“。

(八)动名词

I.要点动名词既具有动词的一些特征，又具有名词的句法功能。 1、动名词的形式，以write为例。

式 | 语态

主动语态

被动语态

一般式

writing

being written

完成式

having written

having been written

否定式 not +动名词 2、动名词的用法 (1)作主语Playing football is my favorite sport.

Travelling with friends at weekend is fun.

作主语的动名词结构复杂且长时，可用it作形式主语。如： It is funtravelling with friends at weekend.

(2)作宾语I enjoy playing PC game.He gave up writing five yearsago.

(3)作表语What he hated most was doing nothing.Seeing is believing.

动名词作表语时，句子的主语常是无生命名词或what引导的名词性从句。(4)作定语There's a dining room in my school. All the people watching laughed.

(5)动名词的复合结构”物主代词(或名词的所有格)+动名词“。如：Tom's going home late made her mother angry. Would you mind my opening the window?

不过，动名词的逻辑主语在遇到以下情况时，必须用名词的普通格(或人称代词的宾格)。①无生命名词The girls were afraid of the door suddenly closing.

Fire burns better by oxygen being at work.

②有生命名词，但表泛指。Have you ever heard of girls smoking?

③两个以上的有生命的名词并列。Do you still remember my parents and me coming to see you thatday?

3.后面常接动名词的动词和短语mind, enjoy, finish, consider, practise, magine,

keep, suggest, advise, allow, permit,

be worth doing, be used to doing, be busy doing,

can't help doing, it is no good doing, it is no use doing,

look forward to doing, stick to doing, pay attention to doing,

devote to doing, lead to doing

II.例题例1 She says she doesn't feel like ____ out with you.

A going B to go C for going D went

解析：该题正确答案为A。 feel like = want, 此处like 为介词，后面要接名词或动名词作宾语例2 The garden needs ____.

A water B watering C to water D watered

解析：该题正确答案为B。 need = want = require. 如果物作主语，此三者后要接动名词或to be done这一结构作宾语。例3 Excuse me ____ you.

A interrupting B to interrupt

C interrupted D to have interrupted

解析：该题正确答案为A。excuse 后接动名词作宾语，此句中的me为动名词的逻辑主语(常用于口语中)。

(九)分词

The woman sitting beside the broken window was a friend ofmine.

2、作表语When I came into the room, I found the window was broken.

I'm interested in this book.

3、作宾语补足语I'm going to have my bike repaired.

When I walked home, I saw the thief caught by the police.

4、作状语Seen from the top of the mountain, the city looks small.

The teacher came into the classroom, followed by his students.

现在分词的句法功能。

1、作状语Seeing from the top of the mountain, I found the city wasbeautiful.

Walking along the street, they suddenly saw him.

2、作宾语I hate being spoken ill of.

He considered visiting Japan during the winter vocation.

3、作表语Seeing is believing.

The book is interesting.

4、作宾语补足语I noticed him crossing the street.

Mother caught him smoking in the kitchen.

5、作定语Do you know the man writing a letter?

The worker running a machine is my brother.

分词使用中的几个问题1、现在分词的完成式Having cleaned the room, I went out.

2、现在分词的否定式

Not having received any letter, he felt a little worried.

3、现在分词与过去分词的不同现在分词表示主动、正在，过去分词表示被动、完成I found the man killed there. I found the man standing there.

4、have结构We have the car repaired. We have repaired the car. Wehave Tom repair the car.

We have Tom repairing the car the whole morning.

5、分词作表语We were excited at the news. The football game is exciting.

6、独立主格结构It being a fine day, we went out to visit the park.

中考英语阅读理解答题技巧

首先，我们分析客观题的题目设置。主要有三种形式：

一、细节题;

二、概括题;

三、推测题。

那么，什么是细节题呢?就是那些考查文章中有关事情发生的具体细节的题目，如：时间、地点、人物、事件经过、方式、结果等;什么是概括题呢，就是从文章的整体层面上设置的一类综合性题目，如：为文章选择一个恰当的题目、推测本文作者想要表达的中心思想以及写作目的等;最后一种推测题是这几种题型中难度最大的，它需要建立在对整篇文章内容熟悉掌握的基础上，主要出题形式有根据文章的上下文，猜测某一个单词或者短语在该情景中的具体含义，根据所给的部分文章内容，推测文章的结尾等。

篇10：中考英语知识点总结完整版

1 (see 、hear 、notice 、find 、feel 、listen to 、look at (感官动词)+ do

eg :I like watching monkeys jump

2 (比较级 and 比较级) 表示越来越怎么样

3 a piece of cake =easy 小菜一碟(容易) 补：a place of interest 名胜

4 agree with sb 赞成某人

5 all kinds of 各种各样 a kind of 一样

6 all over the world = the whole world 整个世界

7 along with 同……一道，伴随……

eg : I will go along with you 我将和你一起去

the students planted trees along with their teachers 学生同老师们一起种树

8 As soon as 一怎么样就怎么样

9 as you can see 你是知道的

10 ask for ……求助向…要…(直接接想要的东西) eg : ask you for my book

11 ask sb for sth 向某人什么

12 ask sb to do sth 询问某人某事 ask sb not to do 叫某人不要做某事

13 at the age of 在……岁时 eg：I am sixteen I am at the age of sixteen

14 at the beginning of …… ……的起初;……的开始

15 at the end of +地点/+时间最后;尽头;末尾 eg : At the end of the day

16 at this time of year 在每年的这个时候补：at least 至少

17 be /feel confident of sth /that clause +从句感觉/对什么有信心，自信

eg : I am / feel confident of my spoken English I feel that I can pass the test

18 be + doing 表：1 现在进行时 2 将来时

19 be able to (+ v 原) = can (+ v 原) 能够…… eg : She is able to sing She can sing 补：base on 以…(为)根据

20 be able to do sth 能够干什么 eg :she is able to sing

21 be afraid to do (of sth 恐惧，害怕…… eg : I'm afraed to go out at night I'm afraid of dog

22 be allowed to do 被允许做什么

eg: I'm allowed to watch TV 我被允许看电视 I should be allowed to watch TV 我应该被允许看电视

23 be angry with sb 生某人的气 eg : Don't be angry with me

24 be angry with(at) sb for doing sth 为什么而生某人的气

25 be as…原级…as 和什么一样 eg : She is as tall as me 她和我一样高

26 be ashamed to

27 be away from 远离

28 be away from 从……离开

29 be bad for 对什么有害 eg : Reading books in the sun is bad for your eyes 在太阳下看书对你的眼睛不好

30 be born 出生于

31 be busy doing sth 忙于做什么事 be busy with sth 忙于……

32 be careful 当心;小心 be close to… 离…很近

33 be different from…… 和什么不一样

34 be famous for 以……著名

35 be friendly to sb 对某人友好

36 be from = come from 来自

eg ：He is from Bejing He comes from Bejing Is he from Bejing ? Does he come from Bejing ?

37 be full of 装满……的 be filled with 充满 eg: the glass is full of water the glass is filled with water

38 be glad+to+do/从句

39 be going to + v(原) 将来时

40 be good at(+doing) = do well in 在某方面善长, 善于……

41 be good for 对什么有好处 eg : Reading aloud is good for your English

42 be happy to do 很高兴做某事

43 be helpful to sb 对某人有好处

eg : Reading aloud is helpful to you 大声朗读对你有好处

Exercising is helpful to your bady 锻炼对你的身体有好处

44 be in good health 身体健康

45 be in trouble 处于困难中 eg : She is in trouble They are in tronble

46 be interested in 对某方面感兴趣

47 be late for = come late to 迟到 eg: Be late for class 上课迟到

48 be like 像…… eg : I'm like my mother

49 be mad at 生某人的气

50 be made from 由……制成(制成以后看不见原材料) 补：be made in 在…生产或制造

51 be made of 由……制成(制成以后还看得见原材料)

52 be not sure 表不确定

53 be on a visit to 参观

54 be popular with sb 受某人欢迎补：be please with 对…感到满意

55 be quiet 安静

56 be short for 表____的缩写 eg: 陶 is short for 陶俊杰

57 be sick in bed 生病在床

58 be sorry to do sth be sorry for sb eg : I am sorry for you

59 be sorry to hear that

60 be sorry to trouble sb eg : I am sorry to trouble you

61 be strict in doing sth 严于做某事 eg : He's strict in obeying noles

62 be strict with sb 对某人要求严格 eg: Some students are not strict with them selves 这些学生对自己不严格

63 be strict with sb in sth 某方面对某人严格

64 be supposed to do 被要求干什么

65 be sure 表确定

66 be sure of doing sth 对做某事有信心 eg: He is sure of winning I am sure of learning English well

67 be sure of sth 对做某事有信心 eg: I'm sure of my head (my teacher 我相信我的大脑(老师)

68 be sure that sth 对做某事有信心 eg: I'm suer that he can pass the test 我相信他能通过考试

69 be sure to do sth 一定会做某事

eg: We are sure to pass the test 我们一定会通过这次考试 We are sure to learn English well 我们一定能学好英语

70 be terrified of + 名/动doing 害怕……

71 be terrified to do sth 害怕做某事

72 be the same as … 和什么一样

73 be used to doing sth习惯做某事

eg: My father is used to getting up early 我爸爸习惯早起 He is used to sleeping in class 他习惯上课睡觉

He is used to working hard He is used to hard work 他习惯努力工作

74 be worth doing 值得做什么

75 be(feel) afraid to do sth 害怕做某事 be afraid of sth 害怕某物 be afraid that 丛句

76 because+句子 because of +短语

eg : He was late because he had a headache He was late because of his headache

77 begin to do = start to do 开始做某事 start…with…=begin…with… 以什么开始什么

eg : Let's begin the game with the song I begin to go home

78 between…and… 两者之间

79 borrow sth from sb 向……借…… lend sth to sb ( lend sb sth 借给……什么东西

eg : I borrowed a pen from him he lent a pen to me ( he lent me a pen

80 both = the same(as) = not different(from) 表相同

81 bother 打扰 bother sb to do sth 补：both…and… …和…都

eg : I'm sorry to bother you ,but can you tell me to way to the station

我十分道歉打扰你，但是你能告诉我怎么去车站

the problem has been bothering me for weeks 这个问题困扰了我几个周了

He's bothering me to lend him money

82 by the end of 到……为止

83 call sb sth eg : We call him old wang

84 care 关心 eg : Don't you care about this country's future ?你为什么不关心国家的未来

85 catch up with sb 赶上某人

86 chat with sb 和某人闲谈 take sb to + 地点带某人去某地

87 come in 进来

88 come over to 过来

89 come up with 提出 eg: Can you come up with a good idea 你能想出一个好办法吗?

90 communicate with sb 和某人交流

91 consider + doing 考虑做什么 eg : Why not consider going to lu zhou 为什么不考虑去泸州?

92 dance to 随着……跳舞 eg : She likes dancing to the music 她喜欢随着音乐跳舞

93 decide to do sth 决定做某事

94 do a survey of 做某方面的调查

95 do better in 在……方面做得更好补：do well in 在……方面干的好

96 do wrong 做错补：droup off 放下(某物)

97 Don't forget to do sth 不要忘了做某事

98 Don't mind +doing /从句 /名词不要介意……

99 each +名(单)每一个…… eg : Each student has many books 每一个学生都有一些书

100 end up +doing

101 enjoy +doing 喜欢

102 escape from 从……逃跑

eg: The prisoners have escaped from the prison 犯人从监狱里逃跑出来

Some gas is escaping from the pipe 有一些气体从管子里冒出

103 expect to do sth 期待做某事

104 fall down 摔下来 fall off 从哪摔下来

105 fall in love with sb /sth 爱上什么

106 far from 离某地远 eg : The school is far from my home

107 find +it +adj +to do 发现做某事怎么样

108 find sb/sth +adj 发现什么怎么样?eg : I find the book interesting

109 finish 完成+doing(名词)

110 fit to sb = be fit for sb 适合某人

111 forget to do 没有做而忘了 forget doing 做了而又忘了 eg: Don't forget to go home I forget closing door

112 from…to… 从某某到某某 eg: From me for her

113 get /have sth down 做完，被(别人)做……

eg: I have my hair cut 我理了发(头发被剪了)

Tom got his bad tooth pulled out 汤母把他的坏牙拔掉了(被牙医拔掉了)

114 get a part-time job = find a part-time job

115 get along well with sb = get on well with sb 与某人相处得好

116 get along with sb = get on with sb 与某人相处

117 get ready for = be ready for 为什么而准备 eg : I get ready for math I am ready for math 补：get…bake 退还…

118 get sb in to trouble 给某人麻烦

119 get sb to do sth get out of 从…取出

120 get…from… 从某处得到某物

121 give a talk 做报告 eg: He is give a tall

122 give sth to sb give sb sth 给某人某物

123 go fish 钓鱼 go swimming 游泳补：go over 过一遍;仔细检查

124 go on to do 去做下一件事 go on doing 继续做这件事

125 go out away from go out of

126 go to school 上学(用于专业的) go to the school 去学校(不一定是上学)

127 good way to 好方法

128 hate to do 讨厌没做过的事 hate doing 讨厌做过的事

129 have a party for sb 举办谁的晚会

130 have a talk 听报告谈一谈

131 have been doing 现在完成进行时 eg : You have been talking You have been sleeping since

132 have been to …( 地方)……去过某过地方 have gone to …(地方) 去了某地还没回来 had better(not) do sth 最好(不要)做某事

133 have fun +doing 玩得高兴

134 have sth to do 有什么事要做

eg: I have a lot of homework to do 我有很多家庭作业要做

I have nothing to do 我没什么事情做

135 have to do sth 必须做某事 have sth done 请某人做某事

136 have trouble (problem) (in) doing sth 做什么事情有麻烦

137 have…time +doing have no time to do sth没有时间做某事

138 have…(时间)…off 放……假 eg: I have month off 我请一个月得假

139 hear sb +do/doing 听见某人做某事/正在做某事

140 help a lot 很大用处

141 help sb with sth \one's sth 帮助某人某事(某方面) help sb (to) do sth 帮助某人做某事

142 hope to do sth 希望做某事

143 How about(+doing) = What about(+doing)

144 how do you like = what do you think of 你对什么的看法

145 if : 是否=whether

eg: I don't know if (whether) I should go to the party 我不知道我是否应该去参加晚会

He don't know if (whether) we will arrive on time tomorrow morning 他不知道我们明天早上是否能准时到达

146 if :如果，假如(全部接一般时态)+条件语态从句

eg: I'll go to LuZhou if it does't rain 假如明天不下雨，我就去泸州

If they change the plan they will let me know 假如他们要改变计划，他们会让我知道的

I'll go to England ,if I have enough money next year 如果我明年由足够的钱，我就要去英国

147 in one's opinion = sb think 某人认为

148 in some ways 在某些方面

149 in the end = finally(adv) 最后

150 in the north of… 什么在什么的北方 (north 北 sowth 南 west 西 east 东 )

151 in the sun 在太阳下

152 increase 增加

eg : They've increased the prece of petrol by 3% 他们把石油价增加了3%

the population has increased from 12 million ten years ago to 18 million now

153 instead of +(名 ) 代替

eg: I'd like an apple instead of a pear 我想要苹果，而不要梨子

I like English instead of math 我喜欢英语而不喜欢数学

154 introduce sb to sb 介绍某人给某人 introduce oneself 自我介绍

155 invite sb to do sth 邀请某人做某事

156 It takes sb sometime to do sth 做某人花掉某人多少时间

eg : It took me 5 minutes to do my homework It takes me half an hour to cook

157 It's +adj +for sb to do sth 对某人来说做某事怎么样

158 It's +adj +to do 做某事怎么样

159 It's +adj for sb 对于某人来说怎么样 It's +adj of sb 对某人来说太怎么样

160 It's +adj(for sb) to do(对某人来说) 做某事怎么样 It's +adj of sb to do sth 对某人来说做某事太怎么样

eg : It's nice of you to help me with my English

161 It's a good idea for sb to do sth 对…… 来说是个好主意

162 It's important to sb 对某人来说很重要 eg: It's important to me

163 It's time to do sth It's time for sth 到了该去做某事的时间

eg : It's time to have class It's time for class 该去上课了

164 join = take part in 参加

165 just now 刚才

166 keep +sb /sth +adj /介词短语让什么保持什么样?

167 keep out 不让 …… 进入

168 keep sb adj 让……保持…… eg: I want to keep my mother happy keep healthy 保持健康

169 key to +名词表示：某物的钥匙或某题的答案

170 key to… anser to … key 可以是答题或钥匙

171 laugh at… 取笑…… eg : Don't langh at others We langhed at the joke

172 learn by oneslfe 自学 learn from 从…学习

173 learn from sb 向某人学习eg: We should learn from Lei Feng

174 learn to do sth 学做某事 learn something by heart 背诵记熟

175 let sb do sth 让某人做某事 lend something to somebody把某物借给某人

176 Let sb down 让某人失望 eg ：We shouldn't let our farents down 我们不应该让我们的父母失望

177 live from :离某地远

178 live in +大地方 /at +小地方居住在某地 eg: I live in LuZhou She lives at XuanTan

179 look after = take care of 照顾照看

180 lose one's way 谁迷路 eg : Lose your way 你迷路

181 make a decision to do sth 决定做某事补：make a contribution to doing 贡献给

182 make friends with sb 和谁成为朋友 eg : I want to make friends with you

183 make it early 把时间定的早一点

184 make on exhibition of oneself 让某人出洋相

185 make sb /n +n 使什么成为什么 eg : I made her my step moller I made you my wife

186 make sb /sth +adj 使某人(某物)怎么样 eg : You must made your bed clean

187 make sb /sth adj 使某人/某物怎么样

188 make sb do sth 让某人做某事 eg : I made him write 我以前让他写

189 make up one's mind

190 make…difference to…

191 mind sb to do mind one's doing 介意……做什么

192 most +名 most of +代

193 much too +形容词

194 must be 一定

195 need +名词

196 need sb do sth 需要某人做某事

197 need to do (实义动词) need do (情态动词)

198 no /neithr of hate to do no /neithr of hate doing

199 no +名词

200 not anymore = no more 再也不…… eg: He didn't cry any more He cried no more 他再也不哭

201 not… (形、副)at all eg: He's not tall at all she doesn't junp far at all

202 not…at all 一点都不 not only… but also… 不但…而且…

203 not…either 表否定，也不 eg : I don't japanse either I don't have sister, either 我也没有姐姐

204 not…until 直到……才……

eg: I didn't sleep until my mother came back The child didn't stop crying until I give her sugar

205 offer / provide sb with sth 给某人提供

206 offer sb sth ( offer sth to sb 提供什么东西给某人 eg : I offer you water (I offer water to you 我给你提供水

207 on one's way to… 在谁去那的路上

208 on the one hand 一方面 on the other hand 另一方面

209 on the phone = over the phone 用电话交谈

210 on time 准时 in time 及时

211 one day =some day =someday 一天，有一天

212 one of +可数名词的复数形式

213 one to another 一个到另一个

214 over and over agin 一遍又一遍的 eg : He cleaned the floor over and over agin

215 part-time job 兼职工作 fall-time job 全职工作

216 pay for… 付……钱 pay the bill 开钱，付钱

217 please +do pull…up from…把…从…拉上来

218 please help yourself

219 pleased with sb

220 pool into = pore into

221 practice +doing 练习做某事

222 prefer sth to sth 相对……更喜欢…… eg : I prefer physics to chemisty 在物理和化学中，我更喜欢物理

prefer doing to sth 更喜欢去做…不愿意去做… eg: He prefers riding a bike to diving 他更喜欢骑自行车，不开小车

prefer to do sth rather than do sth 宁愿做…也不愿

eg: My unde prefers to buy a now car rather than repaiv the used one 我叔叔更喜欢买新的车，也不去修旧车

prefer sb not to do sth 更愿意… eg: I prefer her not to come 我不喜欢她不来

223 pretend to do sth 装着去做什么 pretend that 从句

eg : The two cheats pretended to be working very hard 这两个骗子装着努力工作

He pretended that he did not know the answer 他装着不知道答案

224 rather…than 宁可……也不……

eg : I would rather be a doctor than a teacher 我愿肯当医生，也不当老师

He likes dogs rather than cats 他喜欢狗，不喜欢猫

225 regard…as 把……当作……

eg: Please give my best regards to your family 请带我向你的家人我最好的问候

I regard you as my friend 我把你当作我的朋友

He shows little regard for others 他不爱关心别人

226 remid sb about sth 提醒某人什么事 remid sb to do sth 提醒某人做某事

eg : he remids me about cooking (he remids me to cook 他提醒我做饭

227 remid sb of sth 使某人想起什么

eg : the pictures remind me of my school days 这照片使我想起了我的学校

the words that (which) the teacher talke to remind me of my mother

228 return sth to sb 还什么东西给某人

229 say to oneself 对自己说

230 say to sb 对某人说

231 sb spend somemoney on sth 花了多少钱在某事上

232 sb spend sometime with sb 花了多少时间陪谁

233 sb spend sometime(in) doing sth 花了多少时间做某事

234 sb with sb +is sb and sb +are

235 see sb do 看见某人做过某事 see sb doing 看见某人正在做某事

236 seem to do/be +adj 显得怎么样 eg : You seem to be tired You seem to be happy it seem that

237 send +sb sth 送给某人某物

238 send…to…把什么寄到哪里去?

239 shock 使……震惊 eg : Oh , It's only you ! You give me a shock 啊，是你呀!吓我一跳

240 show sb sth 向某人展示某物 eg : I show her the book.

241 show sb sth = show sth to sb 拿什么东西给某人看 eg: Show me your pen Show your pen to me

242 show sth to sb 向某人展示某物 eg : I show the book to her.

243 some…others… 一些……另一些……

244 start…with… 从……开始 begin…with… 从……开始

245 stay away from 远离…… start doing sth/start to dosth 开始做某事

eg : We're told to stay away from the animals whe visiting the zoo 当我们参观zoo 时，我们要远离动物

If you want to lose weight you'd better stay auay from the sweet food 徒工你想减肥，你最好远离甜食

246 stop doing 停下正在做的事

247 stop sb from doing sth 阻止某人做某事

248 stop sb(from) doing 阻止某人做某事

249 stop to do 停下正在做的事去做下一件事

250 such +名这样，这种

251 suit sb 适合某人

252 surprise sb 使某人惊奇 to one's surprise 令某人惊奇

253 take classes 上课 take one's temperature 给某人量体温

254 take sb to 把某人带去 eg : I take you to the hospital

255 take walks = take a walk = go for a walk 散步

256 ①talk to 对谁说 eg : I talk to you ② talk with 和谁说 eg : I talk with him

③ talk of 谈到 eg : we talked of you ④ talk about 谈论关于……

257 talk with sb 和某人说话

258 teach sb sth 教某人做某事

259 tell sb do sth 告诉某人做某事

260 tell sb sth tell sb that 丛句 tell sb not to do sth tell a story

261 tell sb sth 告诉某人某事

262 tell sb to do sth 告诉某人做什么 tell sb not to do sth 告诉某人不要做什么

263 tell…from… thank to幸亏，由于

264 thank you for +doing thank sb for sth 因某事而感谢某人

265 the same +名词(doing)+as…… the more… the more…越…就越…

266 the same…(名)…as as…(adj adv)…as 相同

267 the way to do sth=the way of doing sth 做某方面的方法 the day before yesterday 前天 the way to +地方去哪的路

e g : Do you know the way to learn English

Do you know the way of learning English

268 the way to…(地点) 到哪的路

269 too…to… 太怎样而不能…… adj +enough to 足够…能… so…that +丛句太… 所以… (such+名词…that+从句)

eg: He is too young to go to school = He is so young that he can't go to school

He is old enough to go to school = He is so old that he can go to school

270 transalte ……into…… 把什么翻译成什么 eg : Trasalte English into chinese

271 travel with sb 和某人去旅游

272 try one's best to do sth 尽某人最大的努力去做某事 eg: I will try my best to learn English well

273 try to do sth 想干什么，但没成功 try doing sth 想干什么，已经做过了

eg ：He tried to climb 他想爬上去，但没成功 He tried climbing 他想爬上去，已经做过了

274 try…试衣服 have a try 试一下

275 turn down 开小 ←→ turn up 开大

276 turn off 关上 ←→ turn on 打开 open 拆开

277 upside down 倒着 nuless=if not

278 visit to… 参观某个地方

279 wait for sb 等某人

280 wait for sb to do sth 等某人做什么 wait for sb 等某人 wait for sometime 等多少间

eg : Would you please wait for me to get ready 等我准备好，好吗?

Let's wait for the rain to stop 让我们等雨停吧

281 wake sb up 把某人叫醒 282 want to do sth 想做某事

283 watch sb do sth 观看某人做某事补：wear out把…穿坏

284 welcome to +…(地方) 欢迎到……

285 what about +n /doing eg : what about an apple

286 what if 如果……怎么办 What if +句子

eg : What if it is true ? 如果是真的怎么办?

What if aliens should come to the earth 假如外星人来到地球怎么办?

287 what they will do = what to do

288 What's the matter ? = What's the trouble ? = What's wrong ? 有什么困难?

289 while +延续性动词

290 why don't you do = why not do

291 will you please do will you please not do

292 with one's best = with the help of sb 在某人的帮助下

293 with the help of sb 在某人的帮助下 with one's help

294 work at…在某处工作

295 work with sb 和某人一起工作

296 would like sth /to do sth eg : I would like to go to LuZhou

297 would you please +do 298 yet :至今，用在否定句中

299 you'd better do 最好做某事 = you'd better not do 最好不要做某事

300 不定式 +v(原)

301 联系动词(taste吃起来/sound听起来/look看起来/semll闻起来)+adj

302 名词、副词、形容词修饰 enongh 时, 形容词放在之前，名词副词放在之后

303 太多 too much +不可数 too many +可数 much too 相当于 very ，修饰形容词

304 向宾语提问：Whom 305 向地点提问：Where 306 向方式提问：How

307 向价格和不可数名词提问：How much 308 向可数名词提问：How many

309 向频率提问：How often 310 向时间段提问：How long

311 向时间提问：what time/when 312 向物主代词提问：Whose

313 向职业提问：what do/does……do 314 向主语提问：Who

315 在将来时中，……以后(用 in，一般时态中，……以后(用 after

316 It’s time for sth. 该到做某事的时间了. It’s time to do sth.(It’s time for sb. to do sth) 该到(某人)做某事的时间了.

317 . can’t wait to do sth. 迫不及待地要求做某事.

318. ask (tell)sb. (not )to do sth . 请(告诉)某人(不)做某事.

319. make/let sb. to do sth. 让某人做某事.

320. hear/see/sb. do sth 听见/看见某人做某事.

321. had better(not )do sth 最好不做某事.

322. It’s better to do sth最好做某事

323 It’s best to do sth最好做某事

324. enjoy 喜欢做某事

325. finish 结束做某事

326. keep 继续做某事

327. keep on doing sth. 继续做某事

328. carry on 继续做某事

329. go on 继续做某事

330. feel like 喜欢做某事

331. stop to do sth 与stop doing sth 停下来去做某事(与)停止做某事.

332. forget/remember to do 与 forget/remember doing sth.忘记/记得去做某事(与) 忘记/记得曾经做过事.

333. keep(precent,stop)sb. from doing sth阻止/防止/阻栏栽人做某事

334. prefer….to ……喜欢…..胜过……

335. prefer to do sth. rather than do ath.宁愿做某事,而不原做某事.

336. used to do sth.过去常常做某事.

337. What’s wong with……? …..出了问题(事)?

338. have nothing to do with….. 与…..无关

339. be busy doing sth . 在忙于做某事

340. too…..to….. 太……以致知于不……

341. so ……that ….. 如此….. 以致知于不……

342. such…..that…… 如此….. 以致知于不……

343. It take sb. some time to do sth .某人做某事用了一些时间.

344. spend …..on sth.(doing sth.)花钱/时间做某事.

345. pay…..for sth.花费(钱)买某物.

346. What /how about……? …….怎么样(好吗)?

347. would like to do sth .想要/愿意做某事..

348. I don’t think that我认为……不…..

349. Why not do sth.? Why don’t you do sth .?为什么不做某事呢?

350. What do you mean by….?你….是什么意思?

351. What do you think of …..(How do you like ….)你认为….怎么样?

352. Mike enjoys collecting stamps . So do I.迈克喜欢集邮.我也也喜欢.

353. The more, the better . 越多越剧好.

354. Thanks for doing sth.谢谢你做了某事.

355. It is said that….. 据说…

356. 感官动词 see, watch, observe, notice, look at, hear, listen to, smell, taste, feel + do 表示动作的完整性，真实性;+doing 表示动作的连续性，进行性,

如: I saw him work in the garden yesterday. 昨天我看见他在花园里干活了。(强调”我看见了“这个事实)

I saw him working in the garden yesterday.昨天我见他正在花园里干活。(强调”我见他正干活“这个动作)

中考英语必考重点语法

一. 词法

1. 名词

(1)名词的可数与不可数

(2)名词复数的规则变化

A.一般情况下加-s。

B.以s, x, ch, sh, 结尾的加-es

C.以辅音字母加y结尾的改y为i再加-es

D.以f，fe结尾的，去掉f或fe，变成v再加-es

(3)名词的所有格

A. 单数名词词尾加’s，复数名词词尾若没有s，也要加’s。

如：the worker's bike，the Children’ s ball

B. 表示几个人共有一样东西，只需在最后一个人的名字后加’ s若表示各自所有，则需在各个名字后’ s。

如： This is Lucy and Licy’ s room.

These are Kate's and jack’ s rooms.

C. 如果是通过在词尾加—s构成的复数形式的名词，只加’。

如：the students’ books，the girls’ blouses

2. 代词

人称代词，物主代词，反身代词，指示代词，不定代词

(1)人称代词

第一人称单数

I me my mine myself

复数 we us our ours ourselves

第二人称

单数 you you your yours yourself

复数 you you your yours yourselves

第三人称

单数 he him his his himself

she her her hers herself

it it its its itself

复数 they them their theirs themselves

(2)物主代词

物主代词的用法：形容词性物主代词后面一定要跟上一个名词;

名词性物主代词可作主语、表语、宾语。

(3)反身代词

反身代词的构成分两种：第一、二人称反身代词在形容词性物主代词后加上self或selves，第三人称的反身代词在宾格代词后加上self或selves.

(4)指示代词

指示代词的特殊用法：

(1)为了避免重复，可用that，those代替前面提到过的名词，但是this，these不可以。

(2)this，that有时可代替句子或句子中的一部分。

(5)不定代词

one,some,any,other,another,all,both,each,neither,many,much等

3. 冠词

(1)不定冠词an用在元音读音开头(不是指元音字母)的词前，其余用不定冠词a.

(2)定冠词的基本用法

A. 用在重新提到的人或事物前面。

B. 指谈话双方都知道的人或事物前面。

C. 用在单数可数名词前面，表示某一类人或事物。

(3)定冠词的特殊用法

A. 用在世界上独一无二的事物或方位名词前。

B. 用在序数词、形容词的最高级及only所修饰的名词前。

C. 用在江河、海洋、山脉、湖泊、群岛的名称前面。

D. 用在由普通名词和另外一些词所构成的专有名词前面。

E. 用在姓氏的复数形式前面，表示全家人或这一姓的夫妇二人。

F. 用在乐器名称前。

G. 和某些形容词连用，表示某一类人或事物。

(4)名词前不用冠词的情况

A. 在专有名词 (包括人名、地名、节日、月份、季节) 、物质名词和抽象名词前—般不用冠词。但在以Festival组成的民间节日前要加the。

B. 表示一类人或事物的复数名词前。

C. 名词前有物主代词、指示代词、不定代词或名词所有格修饰时，不用冠词。

D. 三餐饭、球类、棋类、游戏名称前一般不用冠词。正在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。

(sit) at table就餐; sit at the table坐在桌边

go to school去上学;go to the school去那所学校;in hospital住院;in the hospital在那个医院里

4. 数词

(1)数字的表示

三位数数词要在百位和十位(若无十位则和个位)之间加and。

1，000以上的数字，从后向前第三位数加一个“，”，第一个“，”前为thousand，第二个“，”前为million，第三个“，”前为billion。

(2)序数词除了first，second，third外，其余都在基数词尾加-th构成。

(3)分数分子在前，分母在后，分子用基数词，分母用序数词，当分子大于1小时，分母序数词要变成复数。

(4)hundreds(thousands，millions)of……

5. 形容词、副词

(1)形容词的位置

B. 当形容词带有表示度量的词或词组作定语或表语时，定语或表语要后置。如：

We have dug a hole two meters deep.

The hole is about two metres deep.

(2)形容词的比较等级

单音节词和少数双音节词，在词尾加—(e)r，—(e)st来构成比较级和最高级。其他双音节词和多音节词，在前面加more，most来构成比较级和最高级。如：

popular———more popular———most popular

important—more important—most important

(3)副词的比较等级

单音节副词和个别双音节副词通过加-er，-est来构成比较级和最高级。绝大多数副词借助more，most来构成比较级和最高级。

(4)少数形容词和副词比较级/最高级的不规则变化：

原级比较级最高级

well —— better —— best

badly —— worse —— worst

much —— more —— most

little —— less —— least

far —— farther —— farthest

farthest furthest

late —— later —— latest

(5)副词的最高级前面可以不加定冠词the。

6. 介词

(1)表示时间的介词及介词短语

(2)表示地点的介词及介词短语

二. 八种基本时态

1. 一般现在时

概念: 表示经常发生的动作或经常存在的状态。

常和 always , often , usually , sometimes , every day 等表时间的状语连用。

如：1) I go to school every day . 我每天都去学校。(表经常)

2) He is always like that . 他总是那样。 (表状态)

构成： 1) 主语 + be (am / are / is ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词/三单动词 + …

2.一般过去时

概念: 1) 表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

常和表示过去的时间状语连用. 如: yesterday , last week , in , two days ago等.

如: I went to a movie yesterday. 我昨天去看了一场电影.

2) 也可表示过去经常或反复发生的动作.

如: He always went to work by bike last week.

构成: 1) 主语 + be (was / were ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词过去式 +

3. 现在进行时

概念: 表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作.

如: He is singing.

They are watching TV now.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(am/are/is) + 动词-ing形式构成.

4. 过去进行时

概念: 表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作. 这一特定的过去时间除了有上下文暗示外,一般用时间状语来表示.

如: 1) ---What were you doing?

---I was jumping.

2) ---What was the boy doing when the UFO arrived?

---He was sleeping.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(was/were) + 动词-ing形式构成.

5. 一般将来时

如: He will go shopping tomorrow.

They are going to play basketball next week.

构成: 1) 主语 + 助动词will + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + be going to + 动原 + ….

6. 过去将来时

概念: 表示在过去将来的某一时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

构成: 1) 主语(第一人称) + 助动词should + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + would + 动原 + ….

3) 主语 + was/ were going to +动原…

用法: 过去将来时除了上下文暗示外,一般常用在间接引语中,主句谓语动词为过去时态.

如: 1) I should go.

2) You knew I would come.

3) They were going to Naning.

7. 现在完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 ( have / has ) + 动词过去分词 +…

用法例句

表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果. ---Have you had your lunch yet?

---Yes, I have. (现在我不饿了)

8. 过去完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 had + 动词过去分词 +…

用法例句

I had finished my homework when my mom came back home.

三. 三大基本从句

从句的共同特点

从句是指在一个句子中充当一个成分的句子，充当什么成分就叫什么从句，如：充当宾语就叫宾语从句，充当定语成分就叫定语从句。

从以上定义中我们可以得出关于从句的一个最大特点：从句是句子。

1. 宾语从句

宾语从句是指在一个句子中充当宾语的句子，如：He said that he wanted to be a teacher when he grew up.

宾语从句的特点：

①宾语从句有自己的连接词

②宾语从句用陈述语序

③宾语从句的时态

(1)宾语从句的连接词：宾语从句的连接词包括that、if/whether(是否)、特殊疑问词。

(2)宾语从句的语序：

A. 宾语从句的连接词后加陈述语序(主语在前，谓语在后),如：I want to know if he can come tomorrow

B. 当连接词本身又是宾语从句的主语时，后面直接加谓语动词，如：She asked me who had helped him.

(3)宾语从句的时态，只要记住以下口诀就可以了“主现则从任，主过则从过，客观真理一般现”

A. 主现则从任：主句如果是一般现在时，则从句根据时间状语需要从八种时态中任选一种，如：1.He tells me he likes English very much(一般现在时)

如：He told me that he liked playing football(一般过去时)

C. 客观真理一般现:客观真理永远用一般现在时。

如：1.He says the moon goes around the earth.

2. 状语从句

(1)时间状语从句：在一个句子中作时间状语的句子。

时间状语的连接词：when(当…时候) while(当…时候) as(当…时候) after(在…以后) before(在…以前) as soon as(一…就) since(自从…到现在) till /until(直到…

才) by the time(到…为止)依旧是连接词后加陈述语序。

举例：when当…的时候(一般情况下主句是将来时的时候，从句要用一般现在时。)

Mozart started writing music when he was four years old.

(2)原因状语从句：在一个句子中作原因状语的句子。

连接词：由连词because, since, as引导, 也可由for, now that 等词引导。

举例：I didn’t go to school yesterday because I was ill.

(3)条件状语从句：在一个句子中作条件状语的句子。

连接词：if如果, unless (=if not) 除非。(让步)

举例：If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we will go hiking.

(4)目的、结果状语从句

目的状语从句是指在一个句子中充当目的状语的句子。

结果状语从句是指在一个句子中充当结果状语的句子

目的状语从句连接词so that, so…that , in order that 引导。

结果状语从句连接词 so…that, such…that, so much/many…that引导。

举例：so…that 如此…以至于

The scientist’s report was so instructive that we were all very excited.

(5)让步状语从句

让步状语从句是指在句子中作让步的状语的句子

连接词： though, although.，whether…or not

举例：Although he is rich, yet he is not happy.

3.no matter从句

结构：”no matter +特殊疑问词疑问词+陈述语序“ 或”特殊疑问词+后缀ever+陈述语序“

如：No matter what happened, he would not mind.

注意：no matter 不能引导主语从句和宾语从句。

3. 定语从句

定语是指在句子中用来修饰名词、代词的成分。

如：I will give my teacher a bunch of beautiful flower.(中beautiful就是定语)

定语从句是指在一个句子中作定语的句子，定语从句要放在所修饰的词后

如：I have met the doctor who is in the No.1 hospital.

定语从句的连接词：

连接代词：who、which、whom、whose、that

连接副词：when、where、why

中考英语答题技巧

1、单项选择

单项选择题的内容覆盖面非常广泛，考查范围是大纲中所列出的所有语法内容。一般来说，题目会比较倾向于对动词的考查。一些考查语境的题目往往会让考生觉得很难，所以我们要特别重视语境题、时态题等常考类型的题目。单项选择题中，对于那些给出答案非常相似的题目，考生一定要学会整体看问题，正确理解试题原句，认真审准题，利用构词知识推测字意，找出答案。

2、阅读理解

不管是中考、高考还是大学四六级考试，阅读理解都是英语考试中的重头戏。

我们在答题的时候首先要浏览全文，了解文章的大意及中心思想，再阅读全部问题与选项，然后带着问题再次阅读文章。对于一些文字很多篇幅很长的文章，建议可以采取先看问题及选项，然后再阅读文章的方法。这样可以大大节省时间，在阅读的时候也会很有针对性。在草稿纸上写出答案之后，然后再阅读一下相关位置，确定答案的准确性之后再把答案填写到答题卡上。

3、完形填空

中考中的完形填空题的文章选材一般是比较新颖、贴近生活并有一定时代气息。这道大题其目的是考查学生运用语言的能力，甚至包括一些深层次上的理解。这就要求我们在掌握文章主旨大意的基础上能够正确理解句与句、段与段之间的内在联系。所以，我们在答题的时候一定要从多角度去考虑：从上下文考虑;从词汇意义及用法上考虑;从逻辑推理、常识等角度考虑;从惯用法和搭配的角度考虑。

4、短文改错

如果你所在的省份的中考英语科中有短文改错的话，那就要好好对待这类题。首先需要做的是先找语法方面是否存在问题，审视好语法现象和规则。然后再看是否有拼写错误的单词。当遇到难处的时候，可以采取消去法，即先确定哪些是一定对的，那么问题就出现在那些没有把握的地方了。

5、作文

对于英语写作，自己也不要给自己太大的心理压力。实际上，只要把内容表达清楚和充足就足够了。写作的步骤包括认真审题、确定要点、扩展要点、连句成篇、全面检查等。在这里要提醒大家，一定要注意书写规范。

中考英语复习方法

1、查找漏洞，找原因

一门学科学不好，总有这些或者那些的知识漏洞和薄弱环节，比如：有些人介词不会、语法不好等，由于英语知识版块儿和考查的连贯度，只有把以前堆积的知识问题解决了，才能把接下来的知识学好。

2、夯实基础必考点

所有的考试都万变不离其宗，都是以书本上的知识内容为基础，中招英语考试也是一样，课本是基础，针对中考英语复习要依据课本，注重词汇积累和基本语法的练习，以掌握基础知识为主，在夯实基础知识上进一步拔高提升。

3、多背多练

学好英语最大的一个因素就是要勤读勤背，大量的词汇积累有助于学生更好的做好阅读及作文方面的题目，但有时候受记忆规律的制约，总是记得快也忘得快。俗话说好记性不如烂笔头，所以，同学们在学习英语的时候一定要多写，这样才能在反复的强调当中加深记忆。

4、合理规划学习时间

很多学生在学习英语的时候手忙脚乱，不知道从哪下手，复习效率要高就要科学合理的规划时间，规划好每一天的学习时间对学好英语十分的重要。

中考英语复习注意事项

1、每天要坚持听录音、跟读初三的英语课文，在听读过程中留意单词拼写、重点词汇与句型以及需要掌握的语言点，从而进一步落实基础知识。

2、花一些时间整理中考模拟卷和纠错本，帮助自己查漏补缺、温故知新，从而达到有效复习的目的。同时尽可能利用你的周围资源，如请同学和老师来帮你答疑解惑。

3、适当地给自己增加一些中考模拟题的练习，但在做题的过程中应避免偏题和怪题。完型填空和阅读理解每天坚持做1—2篇，在规定时间内完成。良好的语感的养成对英语解题是很有用的。

4、在最后的复习阶段要提醒自己注重解题技巧。比如选择题应采用排除法等进行解答，以便确保准确率。

5、平时应多看一些范文。比如：双语报中的作文题，在下一期里都会有范文提供，这些范文都应看一下，尤其要注意文中承前启后的句子，把这些句子正确的用在自己的作文中，得分就会高很多。平时作文的得分在10分以下的，自己应该多练，并请老师给你面批，这样进步会很快。

6、临近中考，家长和学生都会越来越担心到时候能否考好，所以也往往容易急躁和焦虑。作为家长很有必要帮助自己和孩子调整好心态。只有这样，学生在中考的考场上才能无所畏惧，信心百倍，最大限度地发挥自己的能力。

篇11：中考英语必考语法知识点总结

(1)词法

1. 名词

(1)名词的可数与不可数

(2)名词复数的规则变化

A. 一般情况下加-s。

B. 以s, x, ch, sh, 结尾的加-es

C. 以辅音字母加y结尾的改y为i再加-es

D. 以f，fe结尾的，去掉f或fe，变成v再加-es

(3)名词复数的不规则变化

名词复数的不规则情况主要分为六种，如下所示，有单复同形;集体名词，以单数形式出现，但实为复数;以s结尾，仍为单数的名词;复数形式有时可表示特别意思等。

child---children

foot---feet

tooth---teeth

mouse---mice

man---men

woman---women

注意：与 man 和 woman构成的合成词，其复数形式也是 -men 和-women。如：an Englishman，two Englishmen. 但German不是合成词，故复数形式为Germans;Bowman是姓，其复数是the Bowmans。

B. 单复同形

如：deer，sheep，fish，Chinese，Japanese

li，jin，yuan，two li，three mu，four jin

但除人民币元、角、分外，美元、英镑、法郎等都有复数形式。

如:a dollar, two dollars; a meter, two meters

C. 集体名词，以单数形式出现，但实为复数。

如：people police cattle 等本身就是复数，不能说 a people，a police，a cattle，但可以说a person，a policeman，a head of cattle,the English，the British，the French，the Chinese，the Japanese，the Swiss 等名词，表示国民总称时，作复数用。

如：The Chinese are industries and brave. 中国人民是勤劳勇敢的。

D. 以s结尾，仍为单数的名词.

如：

a. maths，politics，physics等学科名词，为不可数名词，是单数。

b. news 是不可数名词。

c. the United States，the United Nations 应视为单数。

The United Nations was organized in 1945. 联合国是1945年组建起来的。

d. 以复数形式出现的书名，剧名，报纸，杂志名，也可视为单数。

”The Arabian Nights“ is a very interesting story-book.<<一千零一夜>>是一本非常有趣的故事书。

E. 表示由两部分构成的东西.

如：glasses (眼镜) trousers, clothes

若表达具体数目，要借助数量词 pair(对，双); suit(套); a pair of glasses; two pairs of trousers

F.另外还有一些名词，其复数形式有时可表示特别意思，如：goods货物，waters水域，fishes(各种)鱼

(4)名词的所有格

A. 单数名词词尾加’s，复数名词词尾若没有s，也要加’s。

如：the worker's bike，the Children’ s ball

B. 表示几个人共有一样东西，只需在最后一个人的名字后加’ s若表示各自所有，则需在各个名字后’ s。

如：This is Lucy and Licy’ s room.

These are Kate's and jack’ s rooms.

C. 如果是通过在词尾加—s构成的复数形式的名词，只加’。

如：the students’ books，the girls’ blouses

2. 代词

(人称代词，物主代词，反身代词，指示代词，不定代词)

(1)人称代词

第一人称

单数：I me my mine myself

复数：we us our ours ourselves

第二人称

单数：you your yours yourself

复数：you your yours yourselves

第三人称

单数：

he him his his himself

she her her hers herself

it it its its itself

复数：they them their theirs themselves

(2)物主代词

物主代词的用法：形容词性物主代词后面一定要跟上一个名词;

名词性物主代词可作主语、表语、宾语。

(3)反身代词

反身代词的构成分两种：第一、二人称反身代词在形容词性物主代词后加上self或selves，第三人称反身代词在宾格代词后加上self或selves.

(4)指示代词

指示代词的特殊用法：

(1)为了避免重复，可用that，those代替前面提到过的名词，但是this，these不可以。

(2)this，that有时可代替句子或句子中的一部分。

(5)不定代词

one,some,any,other,another,all,both,each,neither,many,much等

3. 冠词

(1)不定冠词an用在元音读音开头(不是指元音字母)的词前，其余用不定冠词a.

(2)定冠词the的基本用法

A. 用在重新提到的人或事物前面。

B. 指谈话双方都知道的人或事物前面。

C. 用在单数可数名词前面，表示某一类人或事物。

(3)定冠词the的特殊用法

A. 用在世界上独一无二的事物或方位名词前。

B. 用在序数词、形容词的最高级及only所修饰的名词前。

C. 用在江河、海洋、山脉、湖泊、群岛的名称前面。

D. 用在由普通名词和另外一些词所构成的专有名词前面。

E. 用在姓氏的复数形式前面，表示全家人或这一姓的夫妇二人。

F. 用在乐器名称前。

G. 和某些形容词连用，表示某一类人或事物。

(4)名词前不用冠词的情况

A. 在专有名词 (包括人名、地名、节日、月份、季节) 、物质名词和抽象名词前—般不用冠词。但在以Festival组成的民间节日前要加the。

B. 表示一类人或事物的复数名词前。

C. 名词前有物主代词、指示代词、不定代词或名词所有格修饰时，不用冠词。

D. 三餐饭、球类、棋类、游戏名称前一般不用冠词。正在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。

(sit) at table就餐;

sit at the table坐在桌边;

go to school去上学;

go to the school去那所学校;

in hospital住院;

in the hospital在那个医院里;

4. 数词

(1)数字的表示

三位数数词要在百位和十位(若无十位则和个位)之间加and。

1,000以上的数字，从后向前第三位数加一个“，”，第一个“，”前为thousand，第二个“，”前为million，第三个“，”前为billion。

(2)序数词除了first，second，third外，其余都在基数词尾加-th构成。

(3)分数分子在前，分母在后，分子用基数词，分母用序数词，当分子大于1小时，分母序数词要变成复数。

(4)hundreds(thousands，millions)of……

5. 形容词、副词

(1)形容词的位置

B. 当形容词带有表示度量的词或词组作定语或表语时，定语或表语要后置。如：

We have dug a hole two meters deep.

The hole is about two metres deep.

(2)形容词的比较等级

单音节词和少数双音节词，在词尾加—(e)r，—(e)st来构成比较级和最高级。其他双音节词和多音节词，在前面加more，most来构成比较级和最高级。如：

popular———more popular———most popular

important—more important—most important

(3)副词的比较等级

单音节副词和个别双音节副词通过加-er，-est来构成比较级和最高级。绝大多数副词借助more，most来构成比较级和最高级。

(4)少数形容词和副词比较级/最高级的不规则变化：

原级比较级最高级

well —— better —— best

badly —— worse —— worst

much —— more —— most

little —— less —— least

far —— farther —— farthest

late —— later —— latest

(5)副词的最高级前面可以不加定冠词the。

6. 介词

(1)表示时间的介词及介词短语

in, at, on, before，after，till，since，for, fromto, until，by，in the middle of，at the beginning of，at the end of，at half past five，at night，in a week，in the morning，in class，at sunrise，in spring/summer/autumn/winter，on Sunday，on Saturday afternoon，on a winter evening，for a long time，for two months，after school，since liberation，before lunch，at the time of，at the age of

(2)表示地点的介词及介词短语

in，at，into，to，on，beside，before，behind，above，under，outside，inside，up，from，far，from，near，across，off，down，among，pastbetween，out，of，around，in the front of， in the middle of， at the back of，at the foot of，at home，at the gate，at the table，in the sky，on the ground，in a tree， in the south，in the sun，in the bed，on one’s way home，by the side of

(2)八种基本形态

1. 一般现在时

概念: 表示经常发生的动作或经常存在的状态。

常和 always , often , usually , sometimes , every day 等表时间的状语连用。

如：

1) I go to school every day . 我每天都去学校。(表经常)

2) He is always like that . 他总是那样。 (表状态)

构成：

1) 主语 + be (am / are / is ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词/三单动词 + …

2.一般过去时

概念:

1) 表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

常和表示过去的时间状语连用.

如:

1)yesterday , last week , in 1998 , two days ago等.

2)I went to a movie yesterday. 我昨天去看了一场电影.

2) 也可表示过去经常或反复发生的动作.

如: He always went to work by bike last week.

构成:

1) 主语 + be (was / were ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词过去式 +

3. 现在进行时

概念: 表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作.

如:

He is singing.

They are watching TV now.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(am/are/is) + 动词-ing形式构成.

4. 过去进行时

概念: 表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作. 这一特定的过去时间除了有上下文暗示外,一般用时间状语来表示.

如:

1) ---What were you doing?

---I was jumping.

2) ---What was the boy doing when the UFO arrived?

---He was sleeping.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(was/were) + 动词-ing形式构成.

5. 一般将来时

概念: 表示将来某个时间要发生的动作或存在的状态,也表示将来经常或反复发生的动作,常与表示将来的时间状语连用.

如:

tomorrow, next week, next year, in the future等.

He will go shopping tomorrow.

They are going to play basketball next week.

构成:

1) 主语 + 助动词will + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + be going to + 动原 + ….

6. 过去将来时

概念: 表示在过去将来的某一时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

用法: 过去将来时除了上下文暗示外,一般常用在间接引语中,主句谓语动词为过去时态.

如:

1) I should go.

2) You knew I would come.

3) They were going to Naning.

构成:

1) 主语(第一人称) + 助动词should + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + would + 动原 + ….

3) 主语 + was/ were going to +动原…

7. 现在完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 ( have / has ) + 动词过去分词 +…

用法：表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果.

如：

---Have you had your lunch yet?

---Yes, I have. (现在我不饿了)

8. 过去完成时

如：

I had finished my homework when my mom came back home.

构成: 主语 + 助动词 had + 动词过去分词 +…

(3)三大基本从句

从句的共同特点

从句是指在一个句子中充当一个成分的句子，充当什么成分就叫什么从句，如：充当宾语就叫宾语从句，充当定语成分就叫定语从句。

从以上定义中我们可以得出关于从句的一个最大特点：从句是句子。

从句的共同特点：

1.从句都有自己的连接词

2.从句都是陈述语序(陈述语序就是主语在前，谓语在后)

如：He is a teacher.主语 He 在谓语 is 之前，因此是陈述语序，而Is he a teacher? 主语 He 在谓语 is 之后，因此不是陈述语序。

1. 宾语从句

宾语从句是指在一个句子中充当宾语的句子.如：He said that he wanted to be a teacher when he grew up.

宾语从句的特点：

①宾语从句有自己的连接词

②宾语从句用陈述语序

③宾语从句的时态

(1)宾语从句的连接词

宾语从句的连接词包括that、if/whether(是否)、特殊疑问词。

(2)宾语从句的语序

A. 宾语从句的连接词后加陈述语序(主语在前，谓语在后).如：I want to know if he can come tomorrow

B. 当连接词本身又是宾语从句的主语时，后面直接加谓语动词.如：She asked me who had helped him.

(3)宾语从句的时态，只要记住以下口诀就可以了“主现则从任，主过则从过，客观真理一般现”

A. 主现则从任：主句如果是一般现在时，则从句根据时间状语需要从八种时态中任选一种.

如：He tells me he likes English very much(一般现在时)

如：He told me that he liked playing football(一般过去时)

C. 客观真理一般现:客观真理永远用一般现在时。

如：1.He says the moon goes around the earth.

2. 状语从句

(1)时间状语从句：在一个句子中作时间状语的句子。

时间状语的连接词：when(当…时候) while(当…时候) as(当…时候) after(在…以后) before(在…以前) as soon as(一…就) since(自从…到现在) till /until(直到…才) by the time(到…为止)依旧是连接词后加陈述语序。

如：when当…的时候(一般情况下主句是将来时的时候，从句要用一般现在时。)Mozart started writing music when he was four years old.

(2)原因状语从句：在一个句子中作原因状语的句子。

连接词：由连词because, since, as引导, 也可由for, now that 等词引导。

如：I didn’t go to school yesterday because I was ill.

(3)条件状语从句：在一个句子中作条件状语的句子。

连接词：if 如果, unless (=if not) 除非(让步)

如：If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we will go hiking.

(4)目的、结果状语从句

目的状语从句是指在一个句子中充当目的状语的句子。

结果状语从句是指在一个句子中充当结果状语的句子

目的状语从句连接词so that, so…that , in order that 引导。

结果状语从句连接词 so…that, such…that, so much/many…that引导。

如：so…that 如此…以至于

The scientist’s report was so instructive that we were all very excited.

(5)让步状语从句

让步状语从句是指在句子中作让步的状语的句子

连接词：though, although.，whether…or not

如：Although he is rich, yet he is not happy.

3. 定语从句

定语是指在句子中用来修饰名词、代词的成分。

如：I will give my teacher a bunch of beautiful flower.(中beautiful就是定语)

定语从句是指在一个句子中作定语的句子，定语从句要放在所修饰的词后

如：I have met the doctor who is in the No.1 hospital.

定语从句的连接词：

连接代词：who、which、whom、whose、that

连接副词：when、where、why

篇12：中考英语必背知识点总结

一. 词法

1. 名词

(1)名词的可数与不可数

(2)名词复数的规则变化

A.一般情况下加-s。

B.以s, x, ch, sh, 结尾的加-es

C.以辅音字母加y结尾的改y为i再加-es

D.以f，fe结尾的，去掉f或fe，变成v再加-es

(3)名词的所有格

A. 单数名词词尾加’s，复数名词词尾若没有s，也要加’s。

如：the worker's bike，the Children’ s ball

B. 表示几个人共有一样东西，只需在最后一个人的名字后加’ s若表示各自所有，则需在各个名字后’ s。

如： This is Lucy and Licy’ s room.

These are Kate's and jack’ s rooms.

C. 如果是通过在词尾加—s构成的复数形式的名词，只加’。

如：the students’ books，the girls’ blouses

2. 代词

人称代词，物主代词，反身代词，指示代词，不定代词

(1)人称代词

第一人称单数

I me my mine myself

复数 we us our ours ourselves

第二人称

单数 you you your yours yourself

复数 you you your yours yourselves

第三人称

单数 he him his his himself

she her her hers herself

it it its its itself

复数 they them their theirs themselves

(2)物主代词

物主代词的用法：形容词性物主代词后面一定要跟上一个名词;

名词性物主代词可作主语、表语、宾语。

(3)反身代词

反身代词的构成分两种：第一、二人称反身代词在形容词性物主代词后加上self或selves，第三人称的反身代词在宾格代词后加上self或selves.

(4)指示代词

指示代词的特殊用法：

(1)为了避免重复，可用that，those代替前面提到过的名词，但是this，these不可以。

(2)this，that有时可代替句子或句子中的一部分。

(5)不定代词

one,some,any,other,another,all,both,each,neither,many,much等

3. 冠词

(1)不定冠词an用在元音读音开头(不是指元音字母)的词前，其余用不定冠词a.

(2)定冠词的基本用法

A. 用在重新提到的人或事物前面。

B. 指谈话双方都知道的人或事物前面。

C. 用在单数可数名词前面，表示某一类人或事物。

(3)定冠词的特殊用法

A. 用在世界上独一无二的事物或方位名词前。

B. 用在序数词、形容词的最高级及only所修饰的名词前。

C. 用在江河、海洋、山脉、湖泊、群岛的名称前面。

D. 用在由普通名词和另外一些词所构成的专有名词前面。

E. 用在姓氏的复数形式前面，表示全家人或这一姓的夫妇二人。

F. 用在乐器名称前。

G. 和某些形容词连用，表示某一类人或事物。

(4)名词前不用冠词的情况

A. 在专有名词 (包括人名、地名、节日、月份、季节) 、物质名词和抽象名词前—般不用冠词。但在以Festival组成的民间节日前要加the。

B. 表示一类人或事物的复数名词前。

C. 名词前有物主代词、指示代词、不定代词或名词所有格修饰时，不用冠词。

D. 三餐饭、球类、棋类、游戏名称前一般不用冠词。正在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。

(sit) at table就餐; sit at the table坐在桌边

go to school去上学;go to the school去那所学校;in hospital住院;in the hospital在那个医院里

4. 数词

(1)数字的表示

三位数数词要在百位和十位(若无十位则和个位)之间加and。

1，000以上的数字，从后向前第三位数加一个“，”，第一个“，”前为thousand，第二个“，”前为million，第三个“，”前为billion。

(2)序数词除了first，second，third外，其余都在基数词尾加-th构成。

(3)分数分子在前，分母在后，分子用基数词，分母用序数词，当分子大于1小时，分母序数词要变成复数。

(4)hundreds(thousands，millions)of……

5. 形容词、副词

(1)形容词的位置

B. 当形容词带有表示度量的词或词组作定语或表语时，定语或表语要后置。如：

We have dug a hole two meters deep.

The hole is about two metres deep.

(2)形容词的比较等级

单音节词和少数双音节词，在词尾加—(e)r，—(e)st来构成比较级和最高级。其他双音节词和多音节词，在前面加more，most来构成比较级和最高级。如：

popular———more popular———most popular

important—more important—most important

(3)副词的比较等级

单音节副词和个别双音节副词通过加-er，-est来构成比较级和最高级。绝大多数副词借助more，most来构成比较级和最高级。

(4)少数形容词和副词比较级/最高级的不规则变化：

原级比较级最高级

well —— better —— best

badly —— worse —— worst

much —— more —— most

little —— less —— least

far —— farther —— farthest

farthest furthest

late —— later —— latest

(5)副词的最高级前面可以不加定冠词the。

6. 介词

(1)表示时间的介词及介词短语

(2)表示地点的介词及介词短语

二. 八种基本时态

1. 一般现在时

概念: 表示经常发生的动作或经常存在的状态。

常和 always , often , usually , sometimes , every day 等表时间的状语连用。

如：1) I go to school every day . 我每天都去学校。(表经常)

2) He is always like that . 他总是那样。 (表状态)

构成： 1) 主语 + be (am / are / is ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词/三单动词 + …

2.一般过去时

概念: 1) 表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

常和表示过去的时间状语连用. 如: yesterday , last week , in , two days ago等.

如: I went to a movie yesterday. 我昨天去看了一场电影.

2) 也可表示过去经常或反复发生的动作.

如: He always went to work by bike last week.

构成: 1) 主语 + be (was / were ) +……

2) 主语 + 实义动词过去式 +

3. 现在进行时

概念: 表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作.

如: He is singing.

They are watching TV now.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(am/are/is) + 动词-ing形式构成.

4. 过去进行时

概念: 表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作. 这一特定的过去时间除了有上下文暗示外,一般用时间状语来表示.

如: 1) ---What were you doing?

---I was jumping.

2) ---What was the boy doing when the UFO arrived?

---He was sleeping.

构成: 主语 + 助动词be(was/were) + 动词-ing形式构成.

5. 一般将来时

如: He will go shopping tomorrow.

They are going to play basketball next week.

构成: 1) 主语 + 助动词will + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + be going to + 动原 + ….

6. 过去将来时

概念: 表示在过去将来的某一时间发生的动作或存在的状态.

构成: 1) 主语(第一人称) + 助动词should + 动原 +…

2) 主语 + would + 动原 + ….

3) 主语 + was/ were going to +动原…

用法: 过去将来时除了上下文暗示外,一般常用在间接引语中,主句谓语动词为过去时态.

如: 1) I should go.

2) You knew I would come.

3) They were going to Naning.

7. 现在完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 ( have / has ) + 动词过去分词 +…

用法例句

表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果. ---Have you had your lunch yet?

---Yes, I have. (现在我不饿了)

8. 过去完成时

构成: 主语 + 助动词 had + 动词过去分词 +…

用法例句

I had finished my homework when my mom came back home.

三. 三大基本从句

从句的共同特点

从句是指在一个句子中充当一个成分的句子，充当什么成分就叫什么从句，如：充当宾语就叫宾语从句，充当定语成分就叫定语从句。

从以上定义中我们可以得出关于从句的一个最大特点：从句是句子。

1. 宾语从句

宾语从句是指在一个句子中充当宾语的句子，如：He said that he wanted to be a teacher when he grew up.

宾语从句的特点：

①宾语从句有自己的连接词

②宾语从句用陈述语序

③宾语从句的时态

(1)宾语从句的连接词：宾语从句的连接词包括that、if/whether(是否)、特殊疑问词。

(2)宾语从句的语序：

A. 宾语从句的连接词后加陈述语序(主语在前，谓语在后),如：I want to know if he can come tomorrow

B. 当连接词本身又是宾语从句的主语时，后面直接加谓语动词，如：She asked me who had helped him.

(3)宾语从句的时态，只要记住以下口诀就可以了“主现则从任，主过则从过，客观真理一般现”

A. 主现则从任：主句如果是一般现在时，则从句根据时间状语需要从八种时态中任选一种，如：1.He tells me he likes English very much(一般现在时)

如：He told me that he liked playing football(一般过去时)

C. 客观真理一般现:客观真理永远用一般现在时。

如：1.He says the moon goes around the earth.

2. 状语从句

(1)时间状语从句：在一个句子中作时间状语的句子。

时间状语的连接词：when(当…时候) while(当…时候) as(当…时候) after(在…以后) before(在…以前) as soon as(一…就) since(自从…到现在) till /until(直到…

才) by the time(到…为止)依旧是连接词后加陈述语序。

举例：when当…的时候(一般情况下主句是将来时的时候，从句要用一般现在时。)

Mozart started writing music when he was four years old.

(2)原因状语从句：在一个句子中作原因状语的句子。

连接词：由连词because, since, as引导, 也可由for, now that 等词引导。

举例：I didn’t go to school yesterday because I was ill.

(3)条件状语从句：在一个句子中作条件状语的句子。

连接词：if如果, unless (=if not) 除非。(让步)

举例：If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we will go hiking.

(4)目的、结果状语从句

目的状语从句是指在一个句子中充当目的状语的句子。

结果状语从句是指在一个句子中充当结果状语的句子

目的状语从句连接词so that, so…that , in order that 引导。

结果状语从句连接词 so…that, such…that, so much/many…that引导。

举例：so…that 如此…以至于

The scientist’s report was so instructive that we were all very excited.

(5)让步状语从句

让步状语从句是指在句子中作让步的状语的句子

连接词： though, although.，whether…or not

举例：Although he is rich, yet he is not happy.

3.no matter从句

结构：”no matter +特殊疑问词疑问词+陈述语序“ 或”特殊疑问词+后缀ever+陈述语序“

如：No matter what happened, he would not mind.

注意：no matter 不能引导主语从句和宾语从句。

3. 定语从句

定语是指在句子中用来修饰名词、代词的成分。

如：I will give my teacher a bunch of beautiful flower.(中beautiful就是定语)

定语从句是指在一个句子中作定语的句子，定语从句要放在所修饰的词后

如：I have met the doctor who is in the No.1 hospital.

定语从句的连接词：

连接代词：who、which、whom、whose、that

连接副词：when、where、why

初三英语中考备考计划

勤背诵

积极记忆初中课本中出现的生词及词组，理解其用法，并适当运用一些正、反义词对比，相似词对比等方式加强记忆。这一步虽然枯燥乏味，但少了它，初三英语就像折了翅膀的鹰，空有雄心却寸步难行。

多听

多听并不仅仅是为了应试，更重要的一点就是在听的过程中可以逐步增强语感。培养敏锐的语感将有助于增强辨析力和判断力，是英语学习过程中十分重要的一环。认真的听初三老师朗读课文或单词的发音。

多练

通过做大量的习题，可以增强实践经验，不至于临阵发慌，手足无措。而且，熟能生巧，做题也能做出规律，做出语感来。当然，英语学习一门语言本身也有其自身的规律，所谓“四勤”、“四多”也只不过是一种加强的手段。

中考英语学习方法

多听

多听并不仅仅是为了应试，更重要的一点就是在听的过程中可以逐步增强语感。培养敏锐的语感将有助于增强辨析力和判断力，是英语学习过程中十分重要的一环。认真的听老师朗读课文或单词的发音。

多练

通过做大量的习题，可以增强实践经验，不至于临阵发慌，手足无措。而且，熟能生巧，做题也能做出规律，做出语感来。当然，学习一门语言本身也有其自身的规律，所谓“四勤”、“四多”也只不过是一种加强的手段。

勤朗读

这是学好英语的法宝之一。朗读的内容一般说来只限于课本，并不以背诵为目的，而着重将注意力集中于自己的正确发音、连续语气等等。通过朗读可以熟悉单词及其用法，体会英语的语气、语境，增强语感。每天只需半小时左右，但须持之以恒。

勤练习

虽然“题海”战术不足取，但适当做一些练习，尤其是针对自己不足之处的练习是必不可少的，比如完形填空这种难度较大、考查综合能力的题型，平时就应多做一些。每次做完后，认认真真地重新对照答案细细抠一遍，体会这些正确选项究竟合理在什么地方，出题者的意图又是在考查哪些知识点等等。只有在不断的练习、体会中，英语水平及应试能力才会不断提高。

勤总结

相对于其它学科来说，英语的知识点相当零碎，一定要在平时的收集、整理、总结上下功夫。平时听老师提到或是在参考书上看到的一些零碎的小知识都要及时记录下来。

初中英语学习技巧

语法的学习

初中是开始学习系统语法知识的重要阶段。这阶段语法学习好了，以后语法就会感到很轻松。首先应该明确是初中的时候我们学习的更多的是词法而不是句法，因为毕竟从简单开始吧，就算是中考题也基本上没有多少句法的题，所以初中一定要把重心放在词法上，就是名词，介词，冠词，代词，形容词等上面，而这些东西是最零碎的也是最头疼的，我们就更要有细心和耐心。建议每学习一个语法点，在学校教室里抄过一遍笔记后，回家静下心来，再重新整理一遍笔记，去粗取精，这其实是回顾温习的过程，并且要做好分类，不同重要程度的或者难易程度的要用不同的颜色区别对待，并时常翻阅。此外课堂上的语法知识往往和教材同步而并不系统，我们还可以再有一本语法书籍，甚至可以买高中语法，这样有知识的拓展。

文章的学习

现在的教材文章普遍较难。所以阅读文章难度是相当大的。学生在学习文章前一定要预习老师即将要讲的内容，事先把自己认为比较难的单词语法和句子划出来，这样就可以有的放矢。课本上的文章一定要精读，不能说看懂了就可以，而是要把每一个重要的单词和句子都要吃透。

同时对文章中的经典词汇和段落要记笔记，甚至要会背诵，为后面的写作打基础。加强英语学习，阅读是重点，课堂上的文章太过教条和局限，可能缺乏生动性和乐趣性。因此课后也要多读些课外文章。建议读些国内出版的浅显的英语文章，比如象“英语沙龙初级版”英汉对照着看，一定会有兴趣和提高。

写作的学习

写作学习请大家牢牢记住下面两句话。“读书破万卷，下笔如有神”，“熟读唐诗三百首，不会做诗也会吟”，强大的阅读功底是写出好文章的保证，只有输入得多了才能输出得多，因此一定要多读课外文章还有精读文章。在具体联系方面，我们并不需要写太多字数的文章。因为初中生的作文并不需要写太复杂的句子。仅仅是简单句子的结合，所以说中学生的作文不叫真正意义上的作文，而是叫写话。所以鉴于上述，我觉得英汉互译写句子是最好的写作文的方法，把每句话成功的写出来，再结合起来就是一篇好的作文了。

篇13：中考英语必背知识点总结免费

一.从句

在复习从句时，特别要理清时态在从句中的用法，如状语从句(这里主要谈时间状语从句和条件状语从句)时态的用法是，当主句是一般现在时、一般将来时、祈使句时，从句要用现在时。当主句是过去时时，从句则要用过去时态。如：

I won't take part in the party if I'm not invited.

When the weather is fine,many families go out for a walk.

All the students went out when the bell rang.

而since引导的从句比较特殊，它的主句一般用现在完成时或一般现在时，从句则用一般过去时。如：

It is 3 years since I came to the company.

I have known him since I came to middle school.

宾语从句时态的用法则是当主句是一般现在时时，从句的时态可根据从句的时间状语来选择任意时态。当主句是过去时时，从句则只能用过去时态的某一种(客观真理等则只能用一般现在时)。如：

I can't remember if I have seen him before.

二.形容词的用法

(1) 形容词在句中作定语, 表语, 宾语补足语。例如：

Our country is a beautiful country. (作定语)

The fish went bad. (作表语)

We keep our classroom clean and tidy. (作宾语补足语)

(2) 形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时,形容词放在名词后面。

I have something important to tell you.

Is there anything interesting in the film.

(3) 用 and 或 or 连接起来的两个形容词作定语时一般把它们放在被修饰的名词后面。起进一步解释的作用。

Everybody, man and woman, old and young, should attend the meeting.

You can take any box away, big or small.

(4) the+形容词表示一类人或物

The rich should help the poor.

三.副词的用法

1.时间副词

时间副词通常用来表示动作的时间。常见的时间副词有：now today, tomorrow, yesterday, before,late, early, never, seldom, sometimes, often, usually, always等。例如：

He often comes to school late.

He is never been to Beijing.

2.地点副词

地点副词通常用来表示动作发生的地点。常见的地点副词有：here, there, inside, outside, home,upstairs, downstairs, anywhere, everywhere, nowhere, somewhere, down, up, off, on, in,out等。例如：

I met an old friend of mine on my way home.

Put down your name here.

3.方式副词

方式副词一般都是回答“怎样的?”这类问题的，其中绝大部分都是由一个形容词加词尾-ly构成的,有少数方式副词不带词尾-ly, 它们与形容词同形。常见的方式副词有：anxiously, badly, bravely,calmly, carefully, proudly, rapidly, suddenly, successfully, angrily, happily, slowly,

warmly, well, fast, slow, quick, hard, alone, high, straight, wide等。例如：

The old man walked home slowly.

Please listen to the teacher carefully.

四.语法一致的原则

1.以单数名词或代词，动词不定式短语作主语时，谓语动词要用单数;主语为复数时，谓语用复数，例如：

He goes to school early every morning.

The children are playing outside.

To work hard is necessary for a student.

2.由and或both……and连接的并列成分作主语时，谓语动词用复数。例如：

Both he and I are right.

Mr Black and Mrs Black have a son called Tom.

但并列主语如果指的是同一人，同一事物或同一概念，谓语动词用单数。例如：

His teacher and friend is a beautiful girl.

The poet and writer has come.

3.由and连接的并列单数主语之前如果分别由each, every修饰时，其谓语动词要用单数形式。例如：

In our country every boy and every girl has the right to receive education.

Each man and each woman is asked to help.

4.主语是单数时，尽管后面跟有 but ,except, besides, with 等介词短语，谓语动词仍用单数。例

如：

The teacher with his students is going to visit the museum.

Nobody but two boys was late for class.

五.短语动词的分类

1.动词+介词常见的有look for, look after, ask for, laugh at, hear of 等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后。如：

Don’t laugh at others.

Tom asked his parents for a bike.

2.动词+副词

常见的有give up, pick up, think over, find out, hand in,等。这类短语动词的宾语如果是名词，既可放在副词前边，又可放在副词后边;宾语如果是人称代词或反身代词，则要放在副词前边。如：

You’ll hand in your homework tomorrow.

Please don’t forget to hand it in.

3.动词+副词+介词

常见的有 go on with, catch up with等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后边。如：

Go on and I’ll catch up with you in five minutes.

After a short rest, he went on with his research work.

4.动词+名词+介词

常见的有take care of, make use of, pay attention to, make fun of 等。这类短语动词的宾语只能放在介词后边。如：

You should pay attention to your handwriting.

中考英语必背重点词汇短语

1 see、hear 、notice 、find 、feel 、listen to 、look at (感官动词)+do eg:I like watching monkeys jump

2(比较级 and 比较级) 表示越来越怎么样

3 a piece of cake =easy 小菜一碟(容易)

4 agree with sb 赞成某人

5 all kinds of 各种各样 a kind of 一样

6 all over the world = the whole world 整个世界

7 along with同……一道，伴随…… eg : Iwill go along with you我将和你一起去

the students planted trees along with their teachers 学生同老师们一起种树

8 As soon as 一怎么样就怎么样

9 as you can see 你是知道的

10 ask for ……求助向…要…(直接接想要的东西) eg : ask you for my book

11 ask sb for sth 向某人什么

12 ask sb to do sth 询问某人某事 ask sb not to do 叫某人不要做某事

13 at the age of 在……岁时 eg：I am sixteen I am at the age of sixteen

14 at the beginning of …… ……的起初;……的开始

15 at the end of +地点/+时间最后;尽头;末尾 eg : At the end of the day

16 at this time of year 在每年的这个时候

17 be /feel confident of sth /that clause +从句感觉/对什么有信心，自信 eg : I am / feel confident of my spoken English I feel that I can pass the test

18 be + doing 表：1 现在进行时 2 将来时

19 be able to (+ v 原) = can (+ v 原) 能够…… eg : She is able to sing She can sing

20 be able to do sth 能够干什么 eg :she is able to sing

中考英语答题技巧

听力答题技巧：

1、勾划题重点，关键词，特别是一般疑问句的答语。

2、做好笔记，学会记下数字，比如时间，数字，年份等，因为很多时候关于数字需要进行计算，而不是简单的答案。

3、听短文时，特别注意题目的关键词，以及选项的关键词，带着问题有目的地听短文，没听到的及时看下一题，等下一遍的时候再做之前没做的。

完形填空解题技巧：

1、第一遍要通读全文，掌握大意，不用急着做题。

2、抓住结构、语意及逻辑三条线索，推断和预测选项。利用上下文的提示，用学过的`知识和已有的生活经验，扫清部分词汇理解上的障碍。必须从空缺句的内部结构入手，从语法、词语固定搭配、词形变化等角度考虑，务必使所填的单词准确无误。

3、要特别注意语法，如单词的各种形式的变化，种类句型的结构等。

4、选项填完后，通读全文，仔细检查。验证答案，修正错误，着重注意这几点：

(1)文章是否顺畅;

(2)所填单词是否是最适合的单词;

(3)所填单词搭配是否有误。

英语作文写作技巧：

1、认真审题：弄清楚该题目究竟要表达什么，吃透要求，选好人称、有提示词，不要漏掉提示词语。

2、语言地道：尽量使用你初中读本中学过的句子、常用的短语、习惯用法。表达要正确。

3、不要跑题：理解脉络，抓住重点。

4、仔细检查：注意时态、语态、人称是否上下文一致，单词是否有单复数的错误，拼写的错误，字数是否达到要求等。

篇14：浅议英语中的宾语补足语

浅议英语中的宾语补足语

英语中的'宾语补足语是整个中学英语教学的一个重要语言环节,为了帮助学生能够更好地掌握它的构成及其用法,先将宾语补足语归纳如下:

作者：王兴仁作者单位：辽宁省抚顺市六中,辽宁,抚顺,113006 刊名：商情・科学教育家英文刊名：SCIENCE EDUCATOR 年，卷(期)： ”“(10) 分类号：H3 关键词：

篇15：英语四级语法指导：宾语补足语

在备考英语四级的过程中，各位同学一定不要忽略了语法，语法在各个题型中都有体现，而且语法学的好对做题也有非常大的帮助，本文就为各位同学介绍了英语四级常用语法，供同学们参考。

使役动词后的宾语补足语

使役动词除了要有宾语之外还要加上宾语补足语才能使句子的意义完整。常用的使役动词有：have, want, make, get, leave, set, let等。可以担当使役动词宾语补足语的有名词，形容词，介词短语，动词不定式和分词等。

All work and no play makes Jack a dull boy.

A good night’s rest will set you right.

Note:

动词不定式可以担当使役动词的宾语补足语，但在make, let, have等使役动词后，动词不定式作宾语补足语时不用to。

He made her give up the opportunity.

What would you have me do?

Her pride would not let her do this.

分词也可以担当使役动词的宾语补足语。现在分词表示正在进行的主动意义，而过去分词表示已经完成的被动意义。

Her remark left me wondering what he was driving at.

The joke set them all laughing.

He managed to get the job done on time.

I’ve just had some new photos taken.

篇16：初中英语语法：副词作宾语补足语

地点副词一般可以作宾语补足语。

如：Put your dirty socks away, Jim! They are giving out bad smell!(吉姆,把你的脏袜子拿开！它们在散发着臭气。)

Father kept him in and doing his lessons.(父亲把他关在家里做作业)

[注意] “动词+副词”的宾语如果是代词,则该副词应该放在代词之后。

如：He wrote down the word.(他写下了那个词。)→He wrote it down.(他把它写了下来。)

上面对英语语法副词作宾语补足语知识的讲解学习，希望同学们对此知识能很好的掌握，相信大家会做的很好的。

初中英语语法大全：动词的种类

关于英语中动词的种类知识，希望同学们很好的掌握下面的内容学习。

动词的种类

动词是表示动作或状态的词，按其词义和在句子中的作用可分为行为动词，连系动词，助动词和情态动词。

1．行为动词

行为动词可分为及物动词 (vt)和不及物动词(vi)，及物动词表示动作或状态，有完整的词义，能单独作谓语，后跟宾语；不及物动词表示动作或状态，有完整的词义，能单独作谓语，但后面不能直接跟宾语，如要带宾语则与介词或副词构成短语。

如：

More and more people study English.(vt)

The students are listening to the teacher carefully.(vi)

2．连系动词

连系动词本身有一定的词义，但不能独立作谓语，必须与表语一起构成谓语。常用的连系动词有 be, get, turn, become, look, feel, grow, seem, sound, taste, smell等。

如：

Our country is becoming stronger and stronger.

It feels damp.

3．助动词

助动词本身无词义，不能单独作谓语，只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词，表示否定，疑问及动词的时态、语态、人称和数等语法特征，助动词有 be,do,have,shall,will等。

如：

How do you usually come to school?

The children are playing yo-yo now.

4．情态动词

情态动词本身有一定的意义，但不能独立作谓语，只能和主要动词原形一起构成谓语，表示说话人的语气和情态。情态动词没有人称和数的变化。情态动词有 can (could),may(might),must, need, ought to, dare等。

如：

Can I help you?

- Must we go now? -No, you needn't .

a. can与be able to的用法有所区别。can只用于一般现在时和过去时，指本身有能力的”能“；be able to用于各种时态均可，指须经过努力而”能“。

b. must与have/has to的用法。must表示说话人主观认为”必须“，只用于一般现在时和一般将来时；have/has to表示客观需要，意为”不得不“，它可用于各种时态。

c．need和dare既可作情态动词也可作行为动词。

以上对动词的种类知识的内容讲解学习，相信同学们已经能很好的掌握了吧，希望同学们在考试中取得很好的成绩。

初中英语语法大全：动词不定式的形式

对于英语的学习中，关于动词不定式的形式知识点的内容，我们做下面的讲解学习哦。

动词不定式的形式

1．作主语。如：

To learn English is very important.

但实际上不定式作主语常用 it来作形式主语，而将不定式移至谓语动词后作真正的主语。

如上句可表达为：

It's very important to learn English.

2．作表语。如：

My idea is to ring him up at once.

3．作宾语。如：

I have decided to go to Binjiang Primary School.

4．作宾语补足语。

a. ask, want, teach, tell, know, would like, allow等动词后面接动词不定式作宾语补足语。

如： The policemen asked him to get off the bus.

b. hear, see, look at, feel, watch, notice, listen to等动词后接不带to的`动词不定式作宾语补足语。

如： We often see Miss Li clean the classroom.

c. let, make, have这些使役动词后接不带to的动词不定式作宾语补足语。但在被动语态中这些不带to的都须带上to。

如： In those days the bosses often made the workers work day and night.

d.动词help接动词不定式作宾语补足语，可带to也可不带to。

如： Can you help me (to) carry the heavy bag?

5．作定语。

a.与被修饰词有动宾关系。如：I have something important to tell you.但如果不定式动词为不及物动词，后面的介词千万不要省略。

如： Maybe they have three rooms to live in.

b.与被修饰词有主谓关系。

如： Mr Liang is always the first to come and the last to leave.

c.与被修饰之间只有修饰关系。

如： I have no time to play cards.

6．作状语，表示目的、原因、方法、方向、结果等。

如： I'll go to meet my friend at the railway station.

7．不定式复合结构”for sb. to do sth“ 作主语时，常用”It is +adj+ for

of sb. to do sth“的句式。形容词good, bad, polite, unkind, kind, ice, clever,

right, wrong, careful等用”It is +adj +of sb. to do sth."

其他形容词用 for。

如：

It's dangerous for you to ride so fast.

It's very kind of you to help me.

8．动词不定式与疑问句who, what, which, when, how, where, whether等连用。

如： I don't know when to start.

He didn't tell me where to go.

但上面结构相当于一个从句，故上述句子也可表达为：

I don't know when we'll start.

He didn't tell me where he would go.

注意：

a.有些动词或动词短语不能带不定式，只能接动词的-ing形式。

如： enjoy, finish, keep, mind, miss(错过),be busy, go on, keep on, be worth, practise等。

如： The peasants are busy picking apples.

Would you mind my opening the door?

b.有些动词后可接不定式，也可接动词的-ing形式，但意思不同。

如： Lu Jian forgot to post the letter.(该寄但还没做)

Lu Jian forgot posting the letter.(已经寄过信了)

They stopped to sing a song.(停止在做的工作而去做另一件工作)

They stopped singing.(停止正在做的工作)

希望上面对动词不定式的形式知识的内容讲解学习，同学们都能很好的掌握，相信同学们会取得很好的成绩的哦。

初中英语语法大全：短语动词的四种类型

同学们认真学习，下面是老师对短语动词的四种类型知识总结。

短语动词的四种类型

动词与介词、副词等构成的固定短语，叫短语动词。主要有四类：

一、动词+副词

有的一般不跟宾语，如go ahead, fall behind, get up, lie down, go up, run out, give in, stay up等；有的可以跟宾语，如put out, carry out, give up, wake up, check in, eat up, fill in, find out, fix up, hand in, mix up, look up, make out, turn down, work out等。

注意：宾语是名词时，放在副词前面或后面都可以，但若作宾语的是人称代词时，就只能放在动词和副词之间了。如：

We’ve decided to put the meeting off (=put off the meeting) . 我们决定把会议推迟。

We’ve decided to put it off. 我们决定将它推迟。(不说put off it)

二、动词+介词

如ask for, care for, call for, break into, deal with, call on, look for等。后面必须接宾语。如：

I don’t care for tea. 我不喜欢喝茶。

三、动词+副词+介词

如look forward to, put up with, looked up to, go in for, go along with, date back to, look down on, keep up with, add up to, run out of等。如：

She soon caught up with us. 她很快赶上了我们。

四、动词+名词+介词

如take care of, pay attention to, make use of, make contribution to做出贡献等。如：

Take care of your brother while I am away. 我不在的时候，你要照顾好你弟弟。

希望上面老师对短语动词的四种类型知识的讲解学习，同学们都能很好的掌握，相信同学们会学习的很好的哦。

初中英语语法大全：及物动词与不及物动词

关于英语中及物动词与不及物动词的知识学习，我们做下面的内容讲解。

及物动词与不及物动词

根据其后是否带宾语，动词可分为及物动词(带宾语)和不及物动词(不带宾语)。如：

When will he arrive? 他什么时候到？(arrive 不带宾语，为不及物动词)

He reached Beijing yesterday. 他昨天到达北京。(reach 带了宾语，为及物动词)

有的动词既可用作及物动词也可用作不及物动词：

The child is playing. 这小孩在玩。（不及物用法）

The child is playing the piano. 这小孩在弹钢琴。（及物用法）

He is writing. 他在写字。（不及物用法）

He is writing a letter. 他在写信。（及物用法）

The boy is reading. 这男孩在阅读。（不及物用法）

The boy is reading a magazine. 这男孩在看杂志。（及物用法）

上面对及物动词与不及物动词知识的内容讲解学习，希望给同学们的学习很好的帮助，相信同学们会学习的更好的吧。

初中英语语法大全：实义动词与非实义动词

下面是对英语中实义动词与非实义动词知识的内容讲解，希望同学们很好的掌握。

实义动词与非实义动词

根据其含义和句子功用，动词可分为实义动词和非实义动词(包括时态助动词和情态助动词等)。如：

He bought a story book. 他买了一本故事书。(buy 为实义动词)

He has read the story book. 他已读过这本故事书。(has 为时态助动词，read为实意动词)

He should read the story book. 他应该读读这本故事书。(should 为情态助动词,red为实义动词)

上面对实义动词与非实义动词知识的内容讲解学习，相信同学们已经能很好的掌握了吧，希望同学们考试成功。

篇17：语法讲解教案宾语补足语 (人教版高三英语下册教学论文)

语法讲解教案宾语补足语

江苏省黄桥中学高一英语备课组

1. Firs let’s translate some phrases:

1)推选他做班长(队长,主席,总统,国王)make(elect ,choose )him monitor(captain,chairman, president, King)

2）把每天锻炼作为一个规定 make it a rule to exercise every day

3）称这个地方为金三角call the place the GoldenTriangle

4）称它为古英语/不明飞行物call it Old English/ a UFO

5）觉得做某事是快乐的事feel / find / think it a pleasure/ fun to do sth

6）认为帮助别人是我的职责think it my duty to help others

7）认为撒谎是一种耻辱think it a shame to tell lies

8）把门漆成更鲜艳的颜色paint the door a brighter color

Summary: 名词作宾语补足语，即：主+谓+宾+宾补（名词），宾语和宾语补足语之间有一种逻辑上的主系表结构关系。能接这种宾语补足语的动词常见的有：

call / name / consider / believe / think / find / feel / imagine/ elect / make / choose etc.

Attention:

1) 当名词表示某人的职务、头衔时，作宾语补足语的名词前面通常不用冠词，如：

appoint him minister to a foreign country

2) 作宾语补足语的名词通常与宾语在数上保持一致。如：

make Joe his assistant / make Joe and Sue his assistants

3) 可用it作形式宾语

find / feel / think it +n find it my duty / fun / a pleasure to do sth.

2. Second , introduce other patterns.

S+ V+ O+ Object complement.(adj/ adv.)，其中的形容词可分为两类。一类形容词表示宾语所处的状态，如find sb open/ find sth rough; 还有一类形容词表示宾语的特征或心理状态，如：find sb disappointing, find sb interested in sth, find sb deeply moved

1）证明他是错的 prove him (to be ) wrong 使我们保持暖和 keep us warm

2）把衣服弄脏 get the clothes dirty 让门开着 keep / leave the door open

3）认为最好你和我们在一起think it best for you to stay with us

4）使某人不安 make sb uneasy 发现盒子是空的find the box empty

5）觉得有必要说出真相feel / find it necessary to tell the truth

6）使人发疯 drive sb mad/ crazy 祝愿人人无灾无难wish nobody ill

7）发现她不在家find her out / not in 把某人留下leave sb behind

8）发现新工作乏味find the new job boring 觉得这本书值得一读think the book worth reading

9）把门漆成黄色paint the door yellow 发现他是一个令人失望的人find him disappointing

10）觉得他对我的工作满意find him pleased with my work

Attention :

1).常接形容词作宾语补足语的动词有：

find/ feel / think / make / get / keep / consider / drive / prove / wish / paint etc.

有时副词也可作宾语补足语。如：

find him away from home / find him out / find him in / find him abroad

2).可用it 形式宾语

feel it necessary to make everything clear

3.非谓语动词作宾补 S + V + O + Object complement ( to do / doing / done )

A.不定式作宾补

常接带to 的不定式作宾语补足语的动词有：

ask/ advise / allow / permit/ forbid/ force / expect / want / wish / cause / warn / tell / order / would like / remind /like sb (not )to do

1) 请他们来帮你ask them to help you 想要我早点儿到want me to come early

2) 盼望我们赢 expect us to win 吩咐仆人们打开窗子order his servants to open the windows

3) 喜欢他的太太穿着漂亮like his wife to dress well 告诉他不要迟到tell him not to come late

注意不带to的不定式作宾语补足语，常见的动词有：

hear/ listen to / let / make / have / see / notice / watch / look at / catch sight of / observe ect.

让他写文章 have him write the article 注意到他进来并上了楼梯notice him come in and go upstairs

听见他播放CD hear him put on his CD 觉得房子晃动过 feel the house shake

Attention :

1) 动词原形作宾补，改为被动时，要加to，let 和have不用被动。be made to do / be listened to to do

2）注意一些固定句式中的不定式作主语补足语的时态形式。

He is said to study abroad soon.

He is said to have studied abroad, but I can’t remember which country he studied in .

He is said to be studying abroad, but I don’t know which country he is studying in .

Charles Babbage is generally considered ______ the first computer .

A .to have invented B .inventing C .to invent D .having invented

B．现在分词作宾补（强调动作正在进行或现在的状态）

1）看见飞船在窗外飞 see a spaceship flying out of the window

2）让我等了很久keep me waiting for long 3）发现他在桌旁工作find him working at the desk

4）闻到某物烧焦了smell sth burning 5）留下我在外面等着leave me waiting outside

6）看见银行在被抢see a bank being robbed

7. 看见雨披挂在门后面see the raincoat hanging behind the door

Summary :

1) 这类动词常见的有：keep / find / leave / hear / see / smell / watch / get / send etc.

2) 有些感官动词(see, hear, feel , watch )用动原作宾补表动作的全过程，用现分表示动作正在进行。

注意：有些动词的宾补形式不同，意义不同。如：

get sb to do sth. 让某人去做 get sb laughing/ talking / get the clock going 让某人------起来

(sb)send sb to do sth 派某人去做 (sth ) send sb doing 使某人------

The question sent me thinking deeply. The telephone sent him hurrying home.

C.过去分词作宾补

过去分词作宾补表示宾语与宾语补足语之间存在着被动关系，能接过去分词作宾补的动词常见的有：get/ have / make / hear / see / watch / notice etc.其中感官动词表示宾语被动接受某动作，如：get her three sons killed ,notice him knocked down by a car---而使役动词表示使或让某人做某事。如：get the car repaired / have the luggage weighed ---.注意不及物动词的过去分词作宾补时，只表示动作已完成，不表示被动的意思。如：She found her wallet gone.

1.) He saw many trees cut (cut )down . They got their village surrounded (surround)with trees.

2.) He left the door unlocked (unlock)when he was away.

3.) They foreigner had to make himself understood (understand) by gestures.

4.) He often kept the door closed (close) when she left the room.

5.) Nobody noticed her wallet cut (cut) open. Don’t let the source of water polluted (polluted).

6.) Just now they saw the old houses pulled (pull) down.

1. 请人理发have one’s hair cut 2. 听人说意大利语 hear Italian spoken

3. 让眼睛闭着keep one’s eyes shut 4. 留下作品未完成 leave one’s works unfinished

5. 让我们得到水的供应 keep us supplied with water 6. 看到计划被执行see the plan carried out

7. 发现他坐在后面/ 他失踪了find him seated at the back / find him lost / missing

8. 使自己被明白 make oneself understood 让这个案件得到调查have the case looked into

9. 尽快把信寄出去have the letter posted as soon as possible

4.介词作宾补，如：

find sb in the hospital/ put one’s books in good order

find the trees in place / place her in a difficult situation / allow her into the room

bring sth under control

5.有时as引导的短语也作宾补

regard him as our best friend / recognize him as the best leader

6.注意介词with 的复合结构（即介词with+宾语+宾语补足语）

with the boy leading the way / with the water covering the surface of the earth

with the surface covered with water / with his son disappointing

with everything he needed bought / with two exams to worry about

with many problems to settle / with time going by

with the production up by 10%

1. The salesman scolded the girl caught ___________(steal) and let her off.

A .to have stolen B .to be stealing C .to steal D .stealing

2. Mrs Brown was much disappointed to see the washing machine she had had _______ went wrong again.

A .it B .it repaired C .repaired D .to be repaired

3.The chairman thought _____ necessary to invite Professor Smith to speak at the meeting.

A .that B .it C .this D .him

4.With more forests _____________, huge quantities of good soil are being washed away.

A .is being destroyed B .is destroying C .are being destroyed D .being destroyed

5.You should understand the traffic by now. I have had it _______________ often enough.

A .explaining B .to explain C .explain D .explained

6.The flu is believed__________ by viruses that like to reproduce in the cells inside the human nose and throat. A .causing B .being caused C .to be caused D .be have caused

7.The students expected ______ to be more reviewing classes before the final exams.

A .there B .it C .that D .one

8. When he returned years later, he found his hometown _____________completely.

A .to change B .change C .changing D .change

9.Peter wanted his TV ____ , but his wife would rather have it ____________.

A .fixed, thrown B .to be fixed, be thrown C .fixed, throwing D .fixing, throwing

10.With ______leaves ______ in the earth every year, the soil becomes richer and richer.

A .falling, burying B .fallen, buried C .fallen, burying D falling, buried

责任编辑：李芳芳

篇18：宾语补足语讲解和练习学案设计(译林牛津版英语高一)

Object complement

e.g.

We made him our monitor.

The leader made him director of Pompeii dig.

→Verb + object + complement

We call the underlined part object complement because it gives more information about the object. So if we want to find out the object complement in a sentence, we have to find out the object first. Do you agree?

1. A noun or noun phrases can be used as an object complement.

They called him Professor Wang.

I lend him a comic book/ an old bike.

2. An adjective or adjective phrases can be used as object complement

Drive sb crazy

The teacher asked us to leave the door open.

We find this advertisement very interesting and useful.

3. A to-infinitive or a bare infinitive can be used as an object complement

Teachers must forbid middle school students to smoke.

We consider him to be an honest boy.

We believe him to be right.

Mother asked him to throw away the rubbish.

Why did you make him stay in the classroom a bit late?

The Maths teacher had him do the exercises again.

Don’t let things happen again.

Let’s have a party tonight.

Let them set off at once.

4. A Preposition or a Prepositional phrase can be used as an object complement

When we wake up in the morning, we find ourselves on the bed.

5. An adverbial can be used as an object complement

I opened the door to let him in.

You can turn the radio on.He had his new shoes on.

Bring him in Hand your exercises in

6. v-ed or v-ing phrase can be used as an object complement

The teacher kept the girl waiting for her.

7. as 引导的can be used as an object complement

We regard him as a hero.Consider …… as Treat ……as

8. 从句 we’re making our school what your school look like.

9. 特殊 We’re having a class, with a light on.

Tips: ＊ an object complement usually agrees with the object in numbers.

She made Tom her assistant.

She made Tom and Mary her assistants.

1.His parents expect him to be a doctor （当医生）.

2. On his arrival, he found a group of pioneers with flowers in their hands welcoming him. (手拿鲜花欢迎他).

3. You’d better leave the window open during the day. (开着)

4. We consider him to be an honest boy. (是位诚实的孩子).

5. They all call the machine a robot (机器人).

6.Why did you have lights on all night(亮着)?

What’s the difference between neither nor and either or?

Neither or means we won’t choose any of the two while either or means choose either of them. We can use either or as one of the sentence elements to express the idea of alternatives, and to connect subjects\ verbs\ objects\ adverbial. We can also use neither nor as one of the sentence elements to join two negative ideas together.

Ps: when you use neither nor, you shouldn’t use not

Subject: Either the teacher or the guides are looking after the students.

Either you or the headmaster was to hand out prizes to those gifted students at the meeting.

Verbs: I will either listen to the music or do my homework this afternoon.

Objects: You can do either the 1st exercise or the 2nd one.

Neither noodles nor rice is (be) delicious today.

Ps: When neither…nor/ either…or/ not only…but also…are used to join the subjects of a sentence, the verb agrees with the subject closest to it.

宾语补足语练习题

1. The manager discussed the plan that they would like to see オ the next year.(NMET)

A. carry out B. carrying out C. carried out D. to carry out

2. ----There’s a hole in your bag. ---- I know, I’m going to have it _____.

A. mend B. mendingC. mendedD. to be mended

3. Though he had often made his little sister ____, today he was made ____ by his little sister.

A. cry; to cry B. crying; crying C. cry; cry D. to cry; cry

4. They would not allow him _____ across the enemy line.

A. to risk goingB. risking to go C. for risk to go D. risk going

5. I found the door _____ when I got home.

A. opened B. close C. unlocking D. open

6. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him ___.

A. not to B. not to do C. not do D. do not to

7. I couldn’t do my homework with all that noise____.

A. going on B. goes on C. went on D. to go on

8. With a lot of difficult problems_____, the newly-elected president is having a hard time.

A. settled B. settlingC. to settle D. being settled

9. I advised _____ at once.

A. him to starting B. him to start C. to starting D. to start

10. When I put my hand on his chest, I could feel his heart still ____.

A. beat B. to be beating C. beating D. was beating

11. You had better get a doctor _____ your bad tooth.

A. pull out B. to pull out C. pulled out D. pulling out

12. He managed to make himself with his____ English.

A. understand; breakingB. understand; broken

B. C. understood; breaking D. understood; broken

13. The doctor asked him not to leave his wound ______.

A. expose B. exposed C. to exposeD. exposing

14. They are going to have the service man ____ an electric fan in the office tomorrow.

A. installB. to install C. to be installed D. installed

15. After a few rounds of talks, both sides regarded the territory dispute ______.

A. being settled B. to be settled C. had settled D. as settled

16. You will see this product ____ wherever you go.

A. to be advertised B. advertised C. advertise D. advertising

17. His remarks left me _____ about his real purpose.

A. wondered B. wonder C. to wonder D. wondering

18. When I caught him ______ me I stopped buying things there and started dealing with another shop.

A. cheating B. cheat C. to cheatD. to be cheating

19. Though he had often made his little sister ____, today he was made ____ by his little sister.

A. cry; to cry B. crying; crying C. cry; cry D. to cry; cry

20. Did you intend us ___ the new method?

A. using B. to use C. using D. are using オ

21. The teacher encouraged us ______ good compositions.

A. Writing B. written C. to write D. is writing

22. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him ___________.

A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to

23. Mrs. Brown was much disappointed to see the washing machine she had had _______went wrong again.

A .it B. it repaired C .repaired D. to be repaired

24. With a lot of difficult problems_____, the newly-elected president is having a hard time.

A .settled B. settling C. to settle D. being settled

25. With trees, flowers and grass_____ everywhere, my native town had taken on a new look.

A. planting B. planted C. to plant D .to be planted

26. She was glad to see her child well_____ care of.

A. take B. to be taken C. taken D. taking

27. The result of the entrance exams was not made _____to the public until last Thursday.

A. knowing B. known C. to know D. to be known

28. I can make you _____what I say, but you can’t make yourself ____ in English.

A. understand; understandB .understand, understood

C to understand, understandD. understand; to be understood

29. He found them ____ at a table_____.

A. sat; to play chess B. sitting; to play chess

C. seated; playing chess D. seat; play the chess

30. John rushed out in a hurry, ___ the door_____.

A. leaving; unlocked B. leaving; unlocking

C. left; unlockedD. to leave; unlocking

31. We are pleased to see the problem___ so quickly.

A. settled B. settling C. be settled D. having been settled

32. I could feel the wind ___on my face from an open window.

A .to blow B .blowing C. to be blowing D .blown

33. ____ production up by 60%,the company has had another excellent year.

A. As B. For C. With D. Through

34. ____ everything ____ , she left the supermarket with satisfaction.

A. As, buying B. For, to buy C. With, boughtD .Because, to buy

35. Don’t leave the water ____ while you brush your teeth. (天津)

A. runB. running C. being runD. to run

36. He looked around and caught a man ___ his hand into the pocket of a passenger.

A. put B. to be putting C. to put D. putting

37. Laws that punish parents for their little children’s actions against the laws get parents _______. (重庆 2004)

A. worried B. to worry C. worrying D. worry

38. The teacher asked us _____ so much noise. (北京)

A. don’t make B. not make C. not making D. not to make

39. An army spokesman stressed that all the soldiers had been ordered ____ clear warnings before firing any shots. (上海2003)

A. to issueB. being issuedC. to have issued D. to be issued

40.－Good morning. Can I help you? －I'd like to have this package __ ,Madame.

A. be weighed B. to be weighed C. to weigh D. weighed

41. Father will not __us to use his recorders.

A. have B. let C .agree D. allow

42. John was made __the truck for a week as punishment.

A .to wash B. washing C. wash D. to be washing

43. The missing boys were last seen __ near the river.

A. playing B. to be playing C. play D. to play

44. Paul doesn't have to be made __ .He always works hard.

A. learn B. to learn C .learned D. learning

45. Seeing the sun __ above the surface of the sea, we let out a shout of joy.

A. to rise B. to raise C. rising D .raising

46. I was disappointed to find his suggestions __ .

A been turned down B. turned down C. to be turned down D. to turn down

47. The patient was warned ____oily food after the operation.

A. to eat to B. eating not C .not to eat D not eating

48. The speaker raised her voice but still couldn’t make herself _______.

A. hear B. hearing C. to hear D. heard

49. If you go to Xi’an, you’ll find the palaces there more magnificent than commonly _________. A. supposing B. to supposeC. supposedD. suppose

50. It’s so cold today, we must keep the fire ________.

A. to burn B. burning C. burn D. burnt

51. The mother was asked ________ let her children ________ TV every evening;

A. not to; watch B. not to; to watch C. not; watchD. not; watching

52. They didn’t observe her _______ in and go upstairs.

A. come B. came C. to come D. coming

53. How about the two of us ____ a walk down the garden? (MET93 17)

A. to take B. take C. taking D. to be taking

54. I have had my bike , and I’m going to have somebodymy radio tomorrow.

A. repair; to repair B. repairing; to be repaired

C. repaired; repairD. to repair; repairing

55.the room, the nurse found the tape recorder .

A. Entering; stealingB. Entering; gone

C. To have entered; being stolen D. Having entered; to be stolen

56. Could you show me the mobile phone you’d like ______?

A. to have repaired B. repairing it C. having it repaired D. to repair it

57. I have often heard the ABC Song , but I have never heard Aliceit.

A. to be sung; to sing B. being sung; sang C. sung; sing D. sang; singing

58. I can hardly imagine Peter __________ across the Atlantic Ocean in five days.

A. sail B. to sail C. sailing D. to have sailed

59. ---Have you had anyone ______ your newly-bought flat?

---Not yet. I am going to get John _______ a design for it first.

A. to decorate; make B. to decorate; to make

C. decorate; make D. decorate; to make

60. ---“Did you have any difficulty in today’s homework?”---“No, in fact I found __________.”

A. it very easy to do B. it very easy done C. very easy for doing D. very easy to do it

Keys:

1-5 CCAAD 6-10 AACBC 11-15 BDBAD 16-20 CDAAB 21-25 CACAB

26-30 CBBCA 31-35 A BCCB 36-40 DADAD 41-45 D AABC 46-50 BCDCB

51-55 A ACCB 56-60 A CCDA

篇19：高考英语知识点宾语（新教案）

一、教学目标

通过本章复习，使学生明白在句子中宾语的概念及用法。

二、教学重点和难点

宾语的复合结构与双宾语，不定式与动词的ing形式作宾语，带疑问词的不定式作宾语与宾语从句

三、教学方法

Teacher

1．What is object?

2．Give examples, showing what is transitive and what is intransitive.

3．We often speak of a verb as “transitive ”if it takes an object, and “intransitive” if it doesn't. And usually the same verb is used both transitively and intransitively.

（能够跟宾语的动词叫及物动词，不跟宾语的动词叫不及物动词。通常一动词既可跟宾语，又可不跟宾语。）

4．All this （the students' sentences----see left） is correct. In each group, there are two sentences, the former shows that the verb is transitive and the later shows that it is an intransitive verb. What else do you know about transitive verb ?

5．Besides the verb-groups you used in the sentences what else do you know（group verbs ）?

6．What can be an object?

7．在有些情况下用it在句子中作形式宾语，而把真正的宾语不定式或动词的ing形式放在句子的后边。你们能举几个例子吗？

8．By the objective complement we mean that part of the sentence which stands in the same relation to the object as the predicate stands to the subject.

9．We can compare the following.

主谓句

He was a monitor.

Tom was angry.

She laughed.

In the first two sentences, “He” and“Tom” are subjects and “was a monitor”, “was angry ” are predicates. In the third sentence “She” is subject and “laughed” is predicate. （前两句是主谓结构，“He”与“Tom”分别是主语，“was a monitor”与“was angry”分别是复合谓语。第三句“She”是主语，“laugh”是谓语。）

10．Nouns, adjectives and infinitives can be used as objective complements.

（名词，形容词及不定式可用作补语。）

11．In the following., nouns are used as objective complements.

We made him chairman.

We consider him an honest boy.

He named his son John.

I think this a great shame.

这几个句子都是名词作宾补。

12． In a sentence, participles can also be used as objective complements.

在一个句子中分词也可以作宾补。

In the following, ~ing form is used as objective complement. （现在分词）

I found him playing with a snake.

I heard him singing in the next room.

We noticed the boy drawing a picture.

I'm sorry to have kept you waiting.

Don't have the boy crying all the time.

13． Infinitives can be used as objective complements.

（不定式作宾补）

We want him to come back as soon as possible.

I wish you to take me to that place.

We'll invite him to have dinner.

What caused World War Ⅱ to take place?

I cannot bear you to be unhappy.

In the end I got him to see my point of view.

We'd better ask another student to do it.

14．Up to now, we have learned nine verbs which are followed by infinitives without“to”. Can you tell me what they are?

15．Do translations, using infinitives without“to”.

A．有人见他进了屋子。

B．他被迫留下来并接受惩罚。

C．人们常听他唱这支歌。

D．人们注意到小偷溜进了这所房子。

16．The direct and indirect object.

Some verbs frequently or even regularly take two objects.

We bought her some flowers.

In English, we call her the indirect object and some flowers direct object。

17．常见的可跟直接宾语和间接宾语的动词有：

give， send， buy， refuse， tell， ask，teach， write， get， pay， show， cause等。

18． Do the following translations.

A．我明天给你买件新衬衣。

B．你能搞到一两张音乐会的票吗？

C．请出示护照。

D．老板给雇员付酬金。

E．下次来时请带教科书。

F．给我倒杯茶好吗？

G．他拒绝了你的这点儿盛情。

H．别急，我会给你们讲故事的。

I．许久没收到他的来信，他决定给他再写一封。

J．火车晚点给我们带来了不少麻烦。

19．

As is seen from the sentences above, the indirect object nearly always denotes a person and is generally a personal pronoun.

If the direct object is also a personal pronoun （it, them）,it is placed after the verb and the indirect object is often introduced by to or for.

Translate the following sentences.

A．把那东西给我。

B．小明今天早晨把那些东西送给你了。

C．我们会为你买那东西的。

D．我会为她把那些东西弄到手的。

E．他把款付给了我。

20． In grammar, we have a word “gerund”. In a sentence, it can be used as object.

21．“Gerund”的意思是“动名词”，现代英语中，我们不太强调这种说法了，而常用动词的ing形式来代替“动名词”。

在下列词的后边加 ing 作宾语。

avoid, can't help, be busy, excuse, fancy, mind, finish, enjoy, practise, give up, put off, suggest等。

Please give some examples, using the words above.

22．V-ing form can be used after a preposition.

A．魏芳喜欢跳舞。（be fond of）

B．我没考虑讲很长时间。（think of）

C．通过努力学习，你才能多得知识。（by…）

D．感谢你们光临这个音乐会。（for）

E．他主动前来帮忙。（without）

F．对不起，来晚了。（for）

G．我可不喜欢立即就走开这个想法。（the idea of）

23．After“remember”, “stop”“forget”, “regret”, “go on”, “like”, a gerund or an infinitive makes a difference in meaning.

I remember going there.

=I remember that I went there.

I remember to buy the ticket.

＝ I remember that I must buy the ticket.

I forgot locking the door.

=I forgot that I had locked the door.

I forgot to tell him about it.

=I forgot that I should have told him about it.

I like singing pop songs.

=To sing pop songs is my hobby.

I'd like to go with you.

=If you ask me to go with you, I am very happy to do that.

24．由于动名词来源于动词，又起到名词的作用，所以动名词，又像名词那样可以在它的前边用物主代词。

e.g. your coming, your being late, etc.

Give some sentences, showing that you know the usage.

25． Some verbs, such as“ know”, “wonder”, “show”, “teach”, “tell”,“ask”and“learn” can be followed by an infinitive with“how”, “what”, “when”, “where”and “whether”.

A．Do you know what to do next?

B．He learned how to make model planes.

C．We have not made up our mind whether to go or stay here.

D．I wonder why to do it.

E．Tell me where to go and what to see.

F．Let's ask the policeman which way to go.

26．宾语从句可以出现在及物动词的后边或介词的后边，而且从句要用陈述句式，即主语在前，谓语在后。

I am interested in how you did the experiment.

He got angry because of what you had said about him behind his back.

Can you give me some more examples?

Students

1．What can be used after a transitive verb is called object.

2．Charles came. （intransitive, for there is no object after “came”. ）

Charles took a ticket.

（transitive, for there is “ticket” after “took”.）

3． Are the following correct?

A．The girl plays the violin.

She plays very well.

B．The headmaster left Beijing.

He left yesterday.

C．He is painting a picture.

以上中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语（整理19篇）的内容，由互汇范文网-搜集整理分享。

中考英语知识点总结：with和宾语补足语（整理19篇）

推荐文章